Gauging Manual PDF

GAUGING SYSTEMS
OSP-P100M
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
(2nd Edition)
Pub No. 4765-E-R1 (ME51-326-R2) June 2005
4765-E P-(i)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself from
hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safety
devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure accident-
free operation.
This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards which
Okuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.
1. Precautions Relating to Machine Installation

(1) Install the machine at a site where the following conditions (the conditions for achievement of
the guaranteed accuracy) apply.
• Ambient temperature: 17 to 25°C
• Ambient humidity: 40% to 75% at 20°C (no condensation)
• Site not subject to direct sunlight or excessive vibration; environment as free of dust, acid,
corrosive gases, and salt spray as possible.
(2) Prepare a primary power supply that complies with the following requirements.
• Voltage: 200 V
• Voltage fluctuation: ±10% max.
• Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz
• Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major
noise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this
could cause malfunction of the CNC unit.
• If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is
no choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large
amount of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine).
(3) Installation Environment

Observe the following points when installing the control enclosure.
• Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.
• Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.
• Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessive
vibrations or shock.
• The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 0 to 40°C.
• The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is 30 to 95% (no conden-
sation).
• The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).
4765-E P-(ii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

(1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent the entry of water,
chips, and dust.
(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there
are no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.
(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL
ON switch on the operation panel.
3. Precautions Relating to Operation

(1) After turning on the power, carry out inspection and adjustment in accordance with the daily
inspection procedure described in this instruction manual.
(2) Use tools whose dimensions and type are appropriate for the work undertaken and the machine
specifications. Do not use badly worn tools since they can cause accidents.
(3) Do not, for any reason, touch the spindle or tool while spindle indexing is in progress since the
spindle could rotate: this is dangerous.
(4) Check that the workpiece and tool are properly secured.
(5) Never touch a workpiece or tool while it is rotating: this is extremely dangerous.
(6) Do not remove chips by hand while machining is in progress since this is dangerous. Always
stop the machine first, then remove the chips with a brush or broom.
(7) Do not operate the machine with any of the safety devices removed. Do not operate the
machine with any of the covers removed unless it is necessary to do so.
(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.
(9) Do not approach or touch any moving part of the machine while it is operating.
(10) Do not touch any switch or button with wet hands. This is extremely dangerous.
(11) Before using any switch or button on the operation panel, check that it is the one intended.
4. Precautions Relating to the ATC

(1) The tool clamps of the magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, but it is possible that
a tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you to dan-
ger: do not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation.
(2) Always inspect and change tools in the magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode.
(3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can cause misoper-
ation. Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chips further
in.
(4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning the
power off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.
4765-E P-(iii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
5. On Finishing Work
(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.
(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.
(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.
(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the
main power disconnect switch.
6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

Trouble Occurs
In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe the
following points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble has
occurred.
(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the
machine.
(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need
to be taken.
(3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.
(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.
(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were
and secure them properly with their screws, etc.
(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage
checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.
(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box.
(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current
leakage and electric shocks.
(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure
a. Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.
b. Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge in
the MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are permitted
to perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.
• MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)

The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.
4765-E P-(iv)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
c. The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board
whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that the
contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory
is supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are han-
dled, the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service per-
sonnel should handle these boards.
(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure
a. Cleaning the cooling unit

The cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive tempera-
ture rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit. Inspect the
following points every three months.
• Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?

The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.
• Is the external air inlet blocked?

If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.
7. General Precautions
(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.
(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient
training.
(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine opera-
tors must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles.
(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct pro-
cedure before operating the machine.
(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any
time and from any position.
(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain high-
voltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.
(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
4765-E P-(v)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8. Symbols Used in This Manual

The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of
particular importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.
DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moder-
ate injury.
CAUTION
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to your
property.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
indicates general instructions for safe operation.
4765-E P-(i)
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Thank you very much for choosing our CNC system. This numerical control system is a expandable CNC
with various features including a multi-main CPU system. Major features of the CNC system are described
below.
(1) Expandable CNC with a multi-main CPU system

A multi-main CPU system on which up to seven engines (main CPUs) can be mounted is used. An excel-
lent performance and cost effectiveness have been realized as a leader of increasingly rapid and accu-
rate machine tools. The CNC system can be adapted to any models and variations by changing the
construction of the main CPUs. The machine is controlled by a built-in PLC.
(2) Compact and highly reliable

The CNC system has become compact and highly reliable because of advanced hardware technology,
including UCMB (Universal Compact Main Board), I/O link, and servo link. The ‘variable software’ as a
technical philosophy of the OSPs supported by a flash memory. Functions may be added to the CNC
system as required after delivery.
(3) NC operation panels

The following types of NC operation panels are offered to improve the user-friendliness.
• Color CRT operation panels
• Thin color operation panels (horizontal)
• Thin color operation panels (vertical)

One or more of the above types may not be used for some models.
(4) Machining management functions

These functions contribute to the efficient operation of the CNC system and improve the profitability from
small quantity production of multiple items and variable quantity production of variations. Major control
functions are described below.
a. Reduction of setup time

With increase in small-volume production, machining data setting is more frequently needed. The
simplified file operation facilitates such troublesome operation. The documents necessary for setup,
such as work instructions, are displayed on the CNC system to eliminate the necessity of controlling
drawings and further reduce the setup time.
b. Production Status Monitor

The progress and operation status can be checked on a real-time basis on the screen of the CNC
system.
c. Reduction of troubleshooting time

Correct information is quickly available for troubleshooting.
(5) Help functions

When an alarm is raised, press the help key to view the content of the alarm.
This helps take quick action against the alarm.
4765-E P-(ii)
INTRODUCTION
To operate the CNC system to its maximum performance, thoroughly read and understand this instruction
manual before use.
Keep this instruction manual at hand so that it will be available when you need a help.
Screens
Different screens are used for different models. Therefore, the
screens used on your CNC system may differ from those shown in
this manual.
4765-E P-(i)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL
BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION ....................................................1
1. Overview.................................................................................................................................. 1
1-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset ........................................................................................... 1
1-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection ................................................................................. 1
1-3. Displaying the Result of Gauging ..................................................................................... 2
2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Operation........................ 9
2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point ............................................................................. 10
2-2. Setting the Tool Pot No./Tool No. Table ......................................................................... 15
2-3. Operation Mode Designation .......................................................................................... 16
2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function .......................................................................... 18
2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position (Other Than MC-H) ................................................... 23
2-6. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection ............................................................................... 24
2-7. Cycle Time Reduction for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Break-
age Detection Cycle ....................................................................................................... 29
2-8. New Cycle Time Reduction Function for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Auto-
matic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ............................................................................ 31
3. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for
Special Tools and Attachments ............................................................................................. 35
3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for
Horizontal Tools of MCM ................................................................................................ 35
3-2. Operation for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detec-
tion on B/C-axis Attachments, 90× Angular Attachments and Extension At-
tachments (Option) ......................................................................................................... 42
3-3. Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detec-
tion with 30× Angular Attachments (Option) ................................................................... 51
4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)................................................... 63
4-1. Setting the Y-axis Escape Position................................................................................. 63
4-2. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset (Cutter Radius Com-
pensation)/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ................................................... 65
5. Interference Prevention Measures for MCV-A/MCV-A II During Execution of the
Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle............................. 67
5-1. Touch Sensor Operation Interlock .................................................................................. 67
5-2. Measures against Interference during Execution of the Automatic Tool Length
Offset/Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ........................................................................... 67
6. Variables Used in Subprograms ............................................................................................ 69
6-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables ............................................................................. 69
6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools) ...................................... 72
6-3. Explanation of Variables ................................................................................................. 75
7. Cautions on Operation........................................................................................................... 83
8. Program Examples ................................................................................................................ 85
8-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset ......................................................................................... 85
8-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection ............................................................................... 87
4765-E P-(ii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9. Alarm List............................................................................................................................... 90
SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION.....................................................97

1. Overview................................................................................................................................ 97
1-1. Dimension Check Function............................................................................................. 97
1-2. Automatic Zero Offset Function ...................................................................................... 97
2. Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function....................................................................... 98
2-1. Setting the Datum Hole Zero Point ................................................................................. 99
2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation............................................................................. 101
2-3. Touch Probe Length Offset .......................................................................................... 107
2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function ......................................................................... 109
2-5. Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Function ....................................................................... 111
2-6. End Face Gauging Cycle.............................................................................................. 114
2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results ................................................................................. 119
2-8. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two Points........................................... 120
2-9. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two End Faces ................................... 122
2-10.Automatic Zero Offset Function................................................................................... 125
2-11.Copying the Touch Probe Offset Data......................................................................... 126
3. Automatic Gauging Function for B-/C-axis, 90× Angular and Extension Attach-
ments (Option) ..................................................................................................................... 127
3-1. Automatic Gauging for 90× Angular Attachment and B-/C-axis Attachment
(PAB=90×) .................................................................................................................... 129
3-2. Automatic Gauging for Extension Attachment and B-/C-axis Attachment
(PAB=0×) ...................................................................................................................... 130
4. Power ON/OFF Cycle of Renishaw’s Optical Touch Probe (MP7/MP9/MP10) ................... 131
4-1. Power ON/OFF Cycle Commands ............................................................................... 131
4-2. Power ON/OFF Cycle Operation .................................................................................. 132
5. Details.................................................................................................................................. 134
5-1. Touch Probe Movements ............................................................................................. 134
5-2. Approach Speed to the Workpiece ............................................................................... 137
5-3. Variables Used in Subprograms ................................................................................... 139
6. Touch Probe Safety Measures ............................................................................................ 151
6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation .......................................................................... 151
6-2. Replacing the Touch Probe Battery.............................................................................. 151
7. Supplementary Information.................................................................................................. 153
8. Program Examples .............................................................................................................. 155
8-1. ID Gauging ................................................................................................................... 155
8-2. OD Gauging.................................................................................................................. 156
8-3. End Face Gauging on Z-axis ........................................................................................ 157
8-4. Distance between End Faces (X-axis direction) ........................................................... 158
8-5. Automatic Zero Offset................................................................................................... 159
8-6. Example Program for MCM Horizontal Spindle ............................................................ 160
9. Alarm List............................................................................................................................. 163
9-1. Alarm List...................................................................................................................... 163
4765-E P-(iii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9-2. Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart ....................................................................... 165

10.Examples of Gauging Result Display .................................................................................. 171
SECTION 3 MANUAL GAUGING ............................................................................174

1. Overview.............................................................................................................................. 174
1-1. Specifications ............................................................................................................... 174
1-2. Overview of Manual Gauging Functions....................................................................... 175
1-3. List of Display Screens ................................................................................................. 179
2. Basic Operation ................................................................................................................... 180
3. Preparation for Gauging ...................................................................................................... 181
3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles ....................................... 181
3-2. Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle..................................................... 188
4. Work Gauging...................................................................................................................... 190
4-1. End Face Gauging (X, Y, Z) ......................................................................................... 190
4-2. I.D. Center Gauging...................................................................................................... 195
4-3. O.D. Center Gauging .................................................................................................... 200
4-4. Internal Faces Center Gauging .................................................................................... 206
4-5. External Faces Center Gauging ................................................................................... 218
4-6. Inclination and Corner Gauging .................................................................................... 230
5. Tool Length Gauging ........................................................................................................... 237
6. Cutter Radius Gauging ........................................................................................................ 240
7. Comparison and Calculation of Gauging Results ................................................................ 243
7-1. Transferring Gauging Results....................................................................................... 243
7-2. Comparison with Gauging Data.................................................................................... 245
7-3. Example of Calculation Results Display ....................................................................... 245
8. Error List .............................................................................................................................. 248
SECTION 4 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION................................................250

1. Specifications....................................................................................................................... 250
2. List of Display Screen .......................................................................................................... 251
3. Switches .............................................................................................................................. 252
3-1. Main Operation Panel ................................................................................................... 241
3-2. Interactive Gauging Operation Panel ........................................................................... 252
4. Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 253
5. Basic Operation ................................................................................................................... 255
6. Outline of Interactive Gauging Function .............................................................................. 256
7. Work Gauging Function ....................................................................................................... 262
7-1. PARAMETER (WORK) Screen .................................................................................... 262
7-2. PREPARATION (WORK) Screen ................................................................................. 263
7-3. X, Y, Z END FACE ....................................................................................................... 269
7-4. I.D. CENTER ................................................................................................................ 273
7-5. O.D. CENTER .............................................................................................................. 276
7-6. INT END CENTER ....................................................................................................... 278
4765-E P-(iv)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7-7. EXT END CENTER ...................................................................................................... 281

7-8. INCLINE, CORNER ...................................................................................................... 284
8. Tool Length Gauging ........................................................................................................... 287
8-1. Parameter (Tool Length) .............................................................................................. 287
8-2. Preparation (Tool Length)............................................................................................. 288
8-3. Tool Length Gauging .................................................................................................... 291
9. Other Supplementary Explanations ..................................................................................... 294
10.Operation Flow .................................................................................................................... 296
11.Error List .............................................................................................................................. 297
4765-E P-1
SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION
SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/

AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETEC-
TION FUNCTION
1. Overview
The automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function automatically calculates
the tool offset data and detects breakage (chipping) of tools such as drills, taps, reamers and boring
bars.
The specifications of this function are classified into the following two types.
• Specifications for automatic tool length offset only, and
• Specifications for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection
A touch sensor is mounted in the machine: a tool mounted in the spindle is brought into contact with
this touch sensor to determine the tool offset data and to detect if the tool has been broken.
For tools which are mounted and removed without using the ATC, refer to the section Tool Manage-
ment Function in the special specifications of the Operation Manual.
1-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset

With the tool length offset function, the tool mounted in the spindle is brought into contact with the
touch sensor to calculate the tool length. A subprogram prepared for this purpose is used for this
operation.
1-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

With the automatic tool breakage detection function, the same contact detection cycle as used for
the tool length offset function is executed to obtain the tool length.
The function compares the obtained tool length with the tool length offset data stored in the CNC
memory to judge if the tool has been broken.
If the tool is found to have been broken, it is replaced with a spare tool.
4765-E P-2
1-3. Displaying the Result of Gauging
1-3-1. Displaying the Gauging Results Display Screen
Display the screen that displays the gauging result (GAUGING RESULTS screen) by following the
steps indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Select an operation mode (automatic, MDI, manual).
2 Press function key DISPLAY CHANGE [F8].

The DISPLAY CHANGE window opens.
3 In the DISPLAY CHANGE window, select “GAUGING RESULTS”.
4 Press function key CLOSE [F8].

The GAUGING RESULTS screen, shown below, is displayed.
ME51326R0200300040001
4765-E P-3
1-3-2. Function Menu
The function menu switches as shown below to display the functions relating to the gauging result
when the extend key, to the right of function key DISPLAY CHANGE [F8], is pressed.
ME51326R0200300050001
When the extend key is pressed.
ME51326R0200300050002
The function menu relating to gauging result processing is described below.
Function Menu Description

TOOL/ZERO Displays the presently set zero offset/tool offset number.
MSB ZERO ON/OFF Displays the offset data presently set for the individual zero offset num-
bers.
MSB TOOL ON/OFF Displays the offset data presently set for the tool length offset number
and the cutter diameter offset number.
SENSstat ON/OFF Displays the value set for system variable VNCOM and the sensor con-
tact status.
VARIOUS ON/OFF Displays the values set for the system variables.
For details on the function keys, refer to [1-3-2-1. TOOL/ZERO Function Key] to [1-3-2-5. VARIOUS
ON/OFF Function Key].
4765-E P-4
TOOL/ZERO Function Key
The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window displays the presently set zero offset number and tool offset num-
bers. To display the TOOL/ZERO pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to [1-3-1. Displaying
the Gauging Results Display Screen].
2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.
3 Press function key TOOL/ZERO [F1].

The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window opens.
ME51326R0200300060001
The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window closes when function key TOOL/ZERO [F1] is pressed
again.
4765-E P-5
MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key
The MSB (VSZO [N]) pop-up window displays the offset data set for the individual zero offset num-
bers. To display the MSB (VSZO [N]) pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :

For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to 1-3-1 “Displaying
the Gauging Results Display Screen”.
3 Press function key MSB ZERO ON/OFF [F4].

The MSB (VSZO [N]) pop-up window opens.
ME51326R0200300070001
The MSB (VSZO [N]) pop-up window closes when function key MSB ZERO ON/OFF [F4] is
pressed again.
4765-E P-6
MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key
The TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION pop-up window displays the offset data set for the individual
tool length offset and cutter radius compensation numbers. To display the TOOL OFFSET/COM-
PENSATION pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :

3 Press function key MSB TOOL ON/OFF [F5].

The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N])
pop-up window opens.
ME51326R0200300080001
The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N])
pop-up window closes when function key MSB TOOL ON/OFF [F5] is pressed again.
4765-E P-7
SENSstat ON/OFF Function Key
The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window displays the values set for system vari-
ables VNCOM and the contact status of the sensor. To display the NC COMMUNICATION
(VNCOM[N]) pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :

3 Press function key SENSstat ON/OFF [F6].

The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window opens.
ME51326R0200300090001
The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window closes when function key SENSstat
ON/OFF [F6] is pressed again.
4765-E P-8
VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key
The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window displays the values set for the individual system variables. To
display the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :

3 Press function key VARIOUS ON/OFF [F7].

The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window opens.
ME51326R0200300100001
The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window closes when function key VARIOUS ON/OFF [F7] is
pressed again.
4765-E P-9
2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Operation
A general breakdown of the operational procedure for carrying out automatic tool length and tool
breakage detection functions is given below.
Zero point setting is necessary only when the

Setting the zero point for the machine is installed.
touch sensor (If higher gauging accuracy is required, however, you
are recommended to set the zero point occasionally.)
When tools in the magazine are replaced, it is neces-
Setting the correspondence
sary to set the new correspondence between the tool
between pot numbers/tool
pot numbers and the tool numbers.
numbers
Executing the automatic tool

Make sure that the tool length offset value is
length offset cycle with the tool
"0±0.005 mm" or "PLI setting±0.005mm".
used for setting the touch
sensor zero point
Call the tool whose tool length offset data is to be
set from the magazine and mount it in the spindle,
Executing automatic tool length then execute the automatic tool length offset cycle.
offset for other tools Repeat this operation for all tools that require tool
length offset data setting.
Setting the tool change

position data This step is not necessary for MC-H.
Usually, the tool breakage detection cycle is exe-

Executing automatic tool cuted after each cutting operation with the relevant
breakage detection cycle tool is completed.
Tool length offset data must be set for tools that are
checked for breakage.
The function determines whether the machining is

continued as programmed or error processing is exe-
Checking for breakage
Tool not cuted according to the result of the automatic tool
broken breakage detection cycle.
Tool broken
This step is not necessary if the setting that specifies
the machine should stop in the alarm stop state when
tool breakage is detected is made.
When the setting that specifies automatic selection of

Pallet change, etc. a spare tool if tool breakage is detected is made, the
error processing on occurrence of tool breakage
should be as follows: the CNC judges that the work-
piece machined using the broken tool is defective,
changes the pallet to a new one and starts machining
for a new workpiece.
ME51326R0200300110001
[Supplement]
With a double-column machining center that has a touch sensor at a location other than the
crossrail (on the table, for example), the Z-axis zero point must be set after positioning the cross-
rail.
4765-E P-10
2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point
2-1-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Z-axis)
Set the Z-axis direction offset value of the touch sensor zero point using a reference tool so that the
automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function operates correctly.
[Supplement]
If Y-axis has to be retracted to set the touch sensor zero point, set the Y-axis retraction position
first by referring to [4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)].
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST= ”, press the CYCLE START button.
Set an appropriate value for " " by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. In this
setting, either the automatic tool length offset mode or the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle may be selected.
The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUG-
ING RESULTS screen.
ME51326R0200300120001
For the procedure for opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, refer to [1-3-2-5. VARIOUS
ON/OFF Function Key].
2 Execute the sensor advance command M144 in the MDI mode. (In the case of a movable type
sensor)
3 Set the reference tool in the spindle, and manually bring the nose of the reference tool near the
Z-axis touch sensor.
There will inevitably be some slight displacement between the center of the sensor and the
center of the reference tool. This displacement, however, does not pose a problem for the suc-
ceeding operation.
4765-E P-11
[Supplement]
The “reference tool” means the tool used for setting the zero point in a work coordinate sys-
tem.
4 At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.
CALL OO30 PAXI=7 PLI= (VFST= )
M02
[Supplement]
The settings for PLI should be as indicated below
Offset Type PLl Setting

Relative offset type 0
Absolute offset type Length from the spindle nose
face
Usually, the tool used for zero setting of the work coordinate system is also used for the sensor
zero point setting cycle. Therefore, there is no tool length difference between the tools used for
the two different zero point setting cycles, and the setting for PLI should be “zero” (PLI = 0).
For the absolute offset type, set the accurate length of the tool currently set in the spindle as
illustrated to the left.
If no value is set for PLI, either “PLI = 150 mm.” or “PLI = 200 mm” is assumed. Which of the
values is used is determined by the machine model.
Tool used for setting the zero point

in a work coordinate system
PLI = 0
PLI = 0
ME51326R0200300120002
[Supplement]
VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.
As the program above is executed, the reference tool automatically comes into contact with
the Z-axis touch sensor, whereupon Z-axis zero offset is executed.
Zero offset of both the X and Y axes is executed so that the present (actual) position of the
reference tool becomes X = 0, Y = 0.
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [2-1-2.
Reference Tool Movements during Z-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting].
4765-E P-12
sensor)
6 Mount a small-diameter drill in the spindle.
7 Bring the drill tip manually near to the touch sensor and align the spindle center (drill center)
with the center of the touch sensor.
CALL OO30 PAXI=3
M02
X- and Y-axis zero offset is executed so that the present (actual) position of the drill becomes X
= 0, Y = 0. (The Z-axis does not move.)
After the execution of the X- and Y-axis zero offset, the Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the
travel end in the positive (+) direction and the sensor retracts, completing touch sensor zero
point setting.
The result is fed back to the offset data of system work coordinate system No. 1.
The set offset data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The offset data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is dis-
played at the X, Y, and Z columns of the NO. 1 line
ME51326R0200300120003
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 1 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length
offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or refer-
enced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up window, refer
to [1-3-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key].
This completes the Z-axis touch sensor zero point setting.

4765-E P-13
2-1-2. Reference Tool Movements during Z-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
During the execution of the Z-axis touch sensor zero point setting, the reference tool moves as indi-
cated below.
Machine operation
(1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.
(2) The spindle is oriented.
(3) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back once and then moves forward.
(4) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate in the negative (-) direction until the reference tool
comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(5) The Z-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back.
2-1-3. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Y-axis)
When the specifications for automatic tool length offset and automatic breakage detection in the Y-
axis direction (diameter direction) are selected, set the Y-axis touch sensor zero point retraction
position first by referring to [2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function].
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST= ”, and press the CYCLE START button.
Set an appropriate value for " " by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. In this
setting, either the automatic tool length offset mode or the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle may be selected.
If an appropriate value is already set for VFST, it is not necessary to set the value here.
ING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window,
refer to [1-3-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].
sensor)
3 Set the reference tool in the spindle, and manually bring the nose of the reference tool near the
Y-axis touch sensor.
Align the center of the reference tool with the center of the Y-axis touch sensor.
CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0(or accurate length of reference tool)

PY=Accurate radius of reference tool (VFST=**)
M02
ME51326R0200300140001
In actual programming, the three lines of program above are expressed in one line as indicated
below.
4765-E P-14
[Example]
CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0 PY=10 (VFST=1)
φ or accurate length of reference tool Accurate radius of reference tool

ME51326R0200300140002
[Supplement]
1) When setting PLI, pay attention to the same point as explained in [2-1-1. Setting the Touch
Sensor Zero Point (Z-axis)].
2) Always set PY. If it is not set, “PY = 0” is assumed.
3) VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.
As the program above is executed, the reference tool automatically comes into contact with
the Y-axis touch sensor, whereupon Y-axis zero offset is executed. Zero offset of both the Z
and X axes is executed at the same time.
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [2-1-4. Ref-
erence Tool Movements during Y-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting].
The result is fed back to the offset data of system work coordinate system No. 4.
The set offset data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The offset data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is dis-
played at the X, Y, and Z columns, respectively.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 4 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length off-
set and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set nor referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up window, refer to [1-3-
2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key].
This completes the Y-axis touch sensor zero point setting.
2-1-4. Reference Tool Movements during Y-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
During the execution of the Y-axis touch sensor zero point setting, the reference tool moves as indi-
cated below.
Machine operation
(3) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back once and then moves forward.
(4) The Z-axis moves to the Y-axis touch sensor position (the position where the Z-axis was first
moved manually).
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the reference tool comes into contact with the
touch sensor.
(6) The Y-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the approach start position.
4765-E P-15
2-2. Setting the Tool Pot No./Tool No. Table

Set the correspondence between tool numbers and tool pot numbers in the tool pot number - tool
number correspondence table.
The table setting shown below uses a machine with 10-tool capacity magazine as an example.
Assign a tool number

to each tool.
Magazine capacity: 10 tools
The total number of tools user for cutting

the various types of workpieces is 300.
Correspondence Table
Toolpot Number Tool Number Write the correspondence between the
tool number and the pot number on the
1 1
screen when tools in the magazine are
2 2 to be changed for new setup.
3 3 The memory of the OSP can hold the life
expectancy data of up to 300 tools.
4 20
5 30 Max. tool number:
Standard 50
6 31 Option 300
7 32
8 105
9 270
10 271
ME51326R0200300160001
The tool offset data obtained by the execution of an automatic tool length offset cycle is set for the
same offset number as the tool number of the tool presently being used (active tool).Similarly, the
tool offset number referred to and compared when the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
executed is the same offset number as the tool number of the active tool.
[Supplement]
To automatically change a tool for a spare tool, tools must be registered in a tool group.
For the procedure for registering tools in a group, refer to the Tool Management Function section
of the special specifications of the Operation Manual.
4765-E P-16
2-3. Operation Mode Designation

The basic operation mode of automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection is
designated by the system variable VFST.
Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated
once: it does not have to be set each time the MSB of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle is called.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.
VFST Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ME51326R0200300170001
Bit No Setting Description

0 Automatic tool breakage detection cycle
Bit 0
1 Automatic tool length offset cycle
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detec-
Bit 1 1
tion cycle in the Y-axis direction.
tion cycle in the Y-axis direction after the execution of the automatic tool
length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis direc-
Bit 2 1
tion.
To execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detec-
tion cycle only in the Z-axis direction, set “0” for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch
sensor position.
Bit 3 1
Set “1” for Bit 3 with machine models such as MCV in which the touch
sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.
Bit 4 0 Always set “0”.
Designates the relative offset type.
0 The tool length in reference to the reference tool used for zero point set-
ting of a work coordinate system is used as the tool length offset data.
Bit 7
Designates the absolute offset type.
1 The length of the tool from the spindle nose surface is regarded as the
tool length offset data.
4765-E P-17
An example of VFST settings is given in the following table.
X-axis
Relative/ Automatic Tool Length
Move- VFST
Model Absolute Z-axis/Y-axis Offset Offset/Automatic Tool
ment Yes/ Value
Offset Type Breakage Detection
No
Automatic tool length offset #01H
Relative
Yes Only Z-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
offset #00H
MC-H detection
MC-V Automatic tool length offset #81H
Absolute
Yes Only Z-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
offset #80H
detection
Only Z-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
#08H
detection
Automatic tool length offset #0BH
Relative
No Only Y-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
offset #0AH
detection
Automatic tool length offset #0DH
MCV Y-axis offset after Z-
axis offset Automatic tool breakage
MCR #0CH
detection
MCM
(Vertical Automatic tool length offset #89H
spindle) Only Z-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
#88H
detection
Absolute
No Only Y-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
offset #8AH
detection
Automatic tool length offset #8DH
Y-axis offset after Z-
axis offset Automatic tool breakage
#8CH
detection
[Supplement]
Refer to [3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Hori-
zontal Tools of MCM] for details of automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection
for the horizontal tools of MCM horizontal.
4765-E P-18
2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function

The automatic tool length offset function automatically corrects the tool length according to the offset
data set using the reference tool.
2-4-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
Automatic tool length offset in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below.
NOTICE
Make sure that the zero point of the Z-axis touch sensor has been set before executing Z-axis
automatic tool length offset. Never execute Z-axis automatic tool length offset when the Z-axis
touch sensor zero point has not been set.
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for " " by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation].
ING RESULTS screen. Refer to [1-3-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the spindle.
When the tool is mounted in the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number dis-
played on the ATC TOOL DISPLAY (MEMORY RANDOM) screen (for the ATC memory ran-
dom specification) or the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) screen (for the ATC
fixed address specification) agrees with the tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle.
This operation is not necessary when the tool is mounted in the spindle by executing the M06
command, either in automatic or MDI operation.
3 Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.

CALL OO30 (VFST= ) (PLI = Anticipated tool length)
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the Z-axis
touch sensor and the tool length offset data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory.
How the tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [2-4-2. Tool Move-
ments during Z-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset].
4765-E P-19
The set tool length offset data can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/
CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The obtained results
are also displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen
ME51326R0200300190001
This ends the Z-axis automatic tool length offset processing.
[Supplement]
2) Set the anticipated tool length for PLI.
If no value is set for PLI, the value set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 43 (dis-
tance from the spindle gauge line) is automatically set as the anticipated tool length.
4765-E P-20
2-4-2. Tool Movements during Z-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
During the execution of the Z-axis automatic tool length offset, the tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch
sensor.
For tools whose nose is not at the center of the spindle, refer to items (6) PX and (7) PY in [6-3.
Explanation of Variables].
(4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the touch
sensor.
(6) The Z-axis moves back several millimeters at a rapid feedrate.
(7) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the touch sen-
sor again.
The result of gauging is stored under the same tool length offset number as the tool number of
the active tool.
4765-E P-21
2-4-3. Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
Automatic tool length offset in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below.
NOTICE
1) Make sure that the zero point of the Z-axis and Y-axis touch sensors has been set before exe-
cuting Y-axis automatic tool length offset. Never execute Y-axis automatic tool length offset
when the touch sensor zero point has not been set.
2) Before executing automatic tool length offset in the Y-axis direction, set the Z-axis tool length
offset data of the tools.
The Z-axis tool length offset data can be set either by executing the Z-axis automatic tool
length offset or by inputting an appropriate value at the TOOL DATA screen.
Procedure :
ING RESULTS screen. Refer to [1-3-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].
2 Mount the tool for which Y-axis automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the spindle.
fixed address specification) agrees with the tool number of spindle mounted tool.
command either in automatic or MDI operation.

CALL OO30 PY= Anticipated cutter radius(VFST= )
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the Y-axis
touch sensor and the cutter radius compensation data is calculated and stored in the CNC
memory.
ments during Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset].
The set cutter radius compensation data can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH
OFFSET/CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The
obtained results are also displayed at the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
This ends the Y-axis automatic tool length offset processing.
[Supplement]
VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.
4765-E P-22
2-4-4. Tool Movements during Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
During the execution of the Y-axis automatic tool length offset, the tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Z-axis
touch sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Y-axis
touch sensor.
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the Y-axis
touch sensor.
(6) The Y-axis comes to a stop when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
The result of gauging is stored under the same cutter radius compensation number as the tool
number of the active tool.
(7) The Y-axis returns at a rapid feedrate.
2-4-5. Continuous Z-axis and Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
To execute automatic tool length offset on the Z-axis and the Y-axis continuously, follow the proce-
dure indicated below.
For points of caution and details of the tool length offset, refer to [2-4-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool
Length Offset] and [2-4-3. Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset].
Procedure :

CALL OO30 PY= Anticipated cutter radius (PLI = Anticipated tool length) (VFST= )
M02
The tool is first brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor then the Y-axis touch sensor.
This ends the continuous Z-axis and Y-axis automatic tool length offset processing.
4765-E P-23
2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position (Other Than MC-H)

When a tool is found to be broken in the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the broken tool
can be automatically returned to the magazine by using a subprogram.
In order to execute this automatic tool return cycle, the tool change position must be set for MC-V
and double-column machining centers since these types of machining centers do not have a preset
ATC home position like MC-H.
If the tool change position is not set for these types of machining centers, the tool change will be car-
ried out just above the touch sensor. Since this may cause problems with some kinds of work-
pieces, it is necessary to set the tool change position for MC-V and double-column machining
centers.
Procedure :
1 Move the spindle to the desired tool change position.

Note that X- and Y-axis must be positioned at the desired tool change position. Positioning of
the Z-axis is not necessary.
CALL OO31
M02
The axes will not move at all even when a program is executed.
The set tool change position data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET
(VSZO [N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The tool change position
data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns of the NO. 2 line.
This completes the tool change position setting.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 2 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length off-
set and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
4765-E P-24
2-6-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Automatic tool breakage detection in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the
touch sensor and the tool change position have been set.
Procedure :
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection is to be executed in the spindle.

CALL OO30 PLE1 PLE1= Tool breakage judgment value (PGO= )
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the touch
sensor and the tool length is obtained.
ments during Z-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].
The obtained tool length is compared to the tool length offset data stored in the CNC memory
and a tool breakage alarm occurs if the difference is greater than the value set for PLE1.
The tool breakage alarm also occurs if the tool nose fails to contact the touch sensor during the
execution of the program.
This ends the Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection processing.
[Supplement]
2) To replace a broken tool with a spare tool, PGO must be designated.
For details of PGO, refer to item (11) PGO(P GO) in [6-3. Explanation of Variables].
4765-E P-25
2-6-2. Tool Movements during Z-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
During the execution of the Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated
below.
Machine operation
(3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Z-axis
touch sensor.
For tools whose nose is not at the center of the spindle, refer to items (6) PX and (7) PY in [6-3.
Explanation of Variables].
(4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate until the tool nose reaches the position 20 mm
away from the touch sensor.
(5) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate to the position 10 mm past the point where the tool
nose would be in contact with the touch sensor.
• If the tool has not been broken or the amount of chipping is smaller than 10 mm:
The tool nose comes into contact with the touch sensor and the Z-axis stops. The tool
length is calculated from the coordinate value of the contact position and is stored in the
CNC memory temporarily.
• If the tool has been broken (amount of chipping is greater than 10 mm):
The tool nose will not contact the touch sensor.
4765-E P-26
2-6-3. Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Automatic tool breakage detection in the Y-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the
touch sensor has been set.
Procedure :
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection is to be executed in the spindle.
When the tool is mounted to the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number dis-

CALL OO30 PLEY=Tool breakage judgment value PY=Anticipated cutter radius (VFST= )
M02
sensor and the cutter radius is obtained.
The obtained cutter radius is compared to the cutter radius compensation data stored in the
CNC memory and a tool breakage alarm occurs if the difference is greater than the value set
for PLEY.
The tool breakage alarm also occurs if the tool fails to contact the touch sensor during the exe-
cution of the program.
This ends the Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection processing.
[Supplement]
2) To replace a broken tool with a spare tool, PGO must be designated.
4765-E P-27
2-6-4. Tool Movements during Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
During the execution of the Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated
below.
Machine operation
sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Y-axis touch
sensor.
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate to the position 10 mm past the point where the tool
nose would be in contact with the touch sensor.
• If the tool has not been broken or amount of chipping is smaller than 10 mm:
The tool nose comes into contact with the touch sensor and the Y-axis stops. The cutter
radius is calculated from the coordinate value of the contact position and is stored in the
CNC memory temporarily.
• If the tool has been broken (amount of chipping is greater than 10 mm):
The tool nose will not contact the touch sensor.
(6) The Y-axis returns at a rapid feedrate.
2-6-5. Continuous Z-axis and Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
To execute automatic tool breakage detection on the Z-axis and the Y-axis continuously, follow the
procedure indicated below.
For items carefully attended to and details of the tool length offset, refer to [2-6-1. Z-axis Automatic
Tool Breakage Detection] and [2-6-3. Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST= ” and press the CYCLE START button.
CALL OO30 (VFST=**) PY=Anticipated cutter radius

PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (Z-axis)
PLEY=Tool breakage judgment value (Y-axis)
M02
ME51326R0200300290001
3 The tool is first brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor to check tool breakage in the
Z-axis direction. When tool breakage is not detected in the Z-axis direction, tool breakage in
the Y-axis direction is checked.
4765-E P-28
2-6-6. Judgment of Tool Breakage
When a spare tool is selected in response to the detection of tool breakage, operation does not stop
even when the breakage is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge the occurrence of tool
breakage at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch the program execu-
tion in accordance with the result of the judgement.
• It can be judged whether or not the tool is broken by reading system variable VOK1.
VOK1 = 0 Tool is not broken.
VOK1 ≠ 0 Tool is broken.
VOK1 indicates the result of the previously executed automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
• Another system variable VOK2 is also available for judgement.

VOK2 indicates the result of automatic tool breakage detection cycles executed after clearance
to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected even once, the value set for VOK2 is “VOK2 ≠ 0”.
• VOK1 and VOK2 are not cleared to 0 when the CNC is reset.
2-6-7. Resetting Broken Tool Registration
When tool breakage is detected by the automatic tool breakage detection function, the tool number
is registered by the tool management function as that of a broken tool.
In order to use the same tool number after taking the necessary measures, such as replacement
with a new tool, the registration of the broken tool number must be cleared.
Refer to Tool Management Function in special specifications of the Operation Manual for the proce-
dure for resetting broken tool registration.
4765-E P-29
2-7. Cycle Time Reduction for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic

Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
By feeding a tool close to the sensor at a rapid feedrate, it is possible to reduce the cycle time of the
automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
Spindle nose face
Tool
G0 (4) Max.
tool Anticipatedtool
length length
G31F=PF1 (5) VLTL PL1
G31F2000 (6) Safety distancePUDT
Sensor
ME51326R0200300320001
To use this function, it is necessary to set the following parameters.
• Optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 3:

Default of maximum tool length for automatic tool length offset/tool breakage detection
With check mark: Valid
Without check mark: Invalid (Initial value)
• Optional parameter (long ward) No. 44: Max. tool length

For this parameter, set the maximum tool length among the tools that will be used.
Setting range: 0 to 999
Unit: mm
Initial setting: 0
[Supplement]
Set an appropriate value for the maximum tool length setting parameter since “0” is set as the ini-
tial value.
4765-E P-30
2-7-1. Automatic tool length offset cycle

Machine operation
sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the point distanced from the touch sensor by “safety
distance (PUDT) + max. tool length (VLTL)”.
This operation is or is not executed according to the setting for the parameter.
(5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF1, to the point distanced from the touch
sensor by “anticipated tool length (PLI) + safety distance (PUDT)”.
If the PLI command is not specified, the Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate specified by PF1 to the
point distanced from the touch sensor by “safety distance (PUDT)”. If the PF1 command is not
specified, the Z-axis moves at F2000.
(6) The Z-axis moves at F2000 to the point 10 mm beyond the anticipated contact point.
It stops when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) The Z-axis returns 5 mm from the contact point.
(8) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the point 10 mm beyond the contact
point.
(9) The tool length offset data is written to the active tool number or the offset number specified by
the PH command.
2-7-2. Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

Machine operation
(1) The same operation as steps 1) to 4) of the automatic tool length offset cycle explained above is
executed.
(2) The Z-axis moves at skip feedrate F4000 to the point 5 mm away the anticipated contact point.
(3) The Z-axis moves at skip feedrate F1000 to the point 10 mm beyond the anticipated contact
point.
4765-E P-31
2-8. New Cycle Time Reduction Function for Automatic Tool Length
Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
By reducing the execution time of the cycle steps that can be reduced in the previous automatic tool
length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the cycle time reduction function is made
more powerful.
This new cycle time reduction function is usable only in the vertical tool direction.
2-8-1. Command Format and Variables of the New Cycle Time Reduction Function
The command format and the variables used by the new cycle time reduction function are described
below.
• Command format
The following is an example command to use the cycle time reduction function.
CALL OO30 PZRC=1 PSFT=10 POVT=20 PF1=5000 PF2=2000 M02
• Variables
PZRC Used to select the new or conventional cycle time reduction function.
“1” selects the new cycle time reduction function and “0” selects the conventional
cycle time reduction function. The default is “0”.
PUDT: Undertravel distance (safety distance)
This defines the point where, during the approach of a cutting tool to the touch
sensor, the approach speed is changed from high-speed to low-speed. The dis-
tance from the touch sensor to the tool nose is designated.
For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is 5 mm.
POVT: Overtravel distance (sensor breakage prevention distance)
Default is 10 mm.
PFA: Approach speed to undertravel point
For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is F4000 mm/min.
PF2: Approach speed to overtravel point
For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is F1000 mm/min.
VMSBU: Setting for CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 36
If the setting for bit 3 of this parameter is “1”, with “0” set for PZRC, the conven-
tional cycle time reduction function is selected.
VLTL: Maximum tool length
The value set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 44
PSFT: Feedrate shift distance
This defines the point where, during approach of a cutting tool to the touch sen-
sor, the approach speed is changed from a rapid feedrate to high-speed (low-
speed if PSFT is not specified). The distance from the touch sensor to the tool
nose is designated.
The default is 5 mm.
4765-E P-32
2-8-2. Tool Movements of New Cycle Time Reduction Function
During the execution of the new cycle time reduction function, the tool moves as indicated below.
Note that tool movements differ according to the setting of the variables.
Variable setting: PZRC = 0, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 0
Machine operation
(1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction
(3) The Y-axis and the X-axis, in this order, move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the
center of the touch sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PFA, to the position PUDT above the touch
sensor zero point.
The Z-axis stops when the tool comes into contact with the sensor.
(5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the position POVT below the touch
sensor zero point.
2)
Rapid feed 3)
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 6)
PFA 4)
Touch sensor PF2 5) PUDT

zero point POVT
ME51326R0200300370001
Variable setting: PZRC = 0, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 1

4765-E P-33
Machine operation
(4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate until the spindle nose face reaches the point VLTL
above the touch sensor zero point.
(5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PFA, to the position PUDT above the touch
sensor zero point.
(6) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the position POVT below the touch
sensor zero point.
2)
Rapid feed 3)
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 4)
Rapid feed 7)
PFA 5)
VLTL
PF2 6) PUDT
POVT
ME51326R0200300370002
Variable setting: PZRC = 1, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 0 or 1

If “PUDT > PSFT”, an alarm (Alarm B 2305 UNTENDED: gauging impossible 64) occurs.
4765-E P-34
Machine operation
(1) If the tool nose is below the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”, the Z-axis moves up at a
rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”
(4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”.
(5) The Z-axis moves down at a skip feedrate PFA to the point “touch sensor zero point + PUDT”.
(6) The Z-axis moves down at a skip feedrate PF2 to the point “touch sensor zero point - POVT”.
(7) The Z-axis moves up at rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”.
2)
Rapid feed 3)
Rapid feed 4)
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 7)
2)
PFA 5) PSFT
PUDT
POVT
PF2 6)
ME51326R0200300370003
4765-E P-35
3. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Function for Special Tools and Attachments
This section deals with the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function
for special tools and attachments. If no such tools or attachments are used, this section may be
skipped.
3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM
The operation procedure for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection func-
tion for horizontal tools of MCM is described below.
[Supplement]
Since the machine operations for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detec-
tion function used for horizontal tools of MCM are similar to those for vertical tools of MCM, part of
the explanation is omitted.
For the information not given below, refer to [2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool
Breakage Detection Operation].
3-1-1. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Break-
age Detection for MCM Horizontal Tools
During the execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for
the horizontal tool of MCM, the tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(2) M76 and M19 are executed.

The swivel head is indexed to the right position and the spindle is oriented.
(3) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to a position just before the touch sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the touch sensor position for the horizontal tool.
(5) From here on, the movements are the same as for a vertical tool.
4765-E P-36
Note, however, that with an MCM horizontal tool, the Z-axis movements of a vertical tool are
replaced by the Y-axis movements of a horizontal tool.
3)
2)
1) 4)
5)
ME51326R0200300400001
3-1-2. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position
When executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for an
MCM horizontal tool, the spindle may strike the workpiece during Z-axis downward operation.
To avoid such a problem, it is necessary to set the Z-axis lower limit position as close to the touch
sensor as possible, but at a position where the spindle or other machine unit will not collide with the
touch sensor unit.
Set the Z-axis lower limit position in the manner indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set.
In this operation, the X- and Z-axis may be at any position.
CALL OO32
M02
When this program is executed, axes do not move.
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Z-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 9 as the Z-axis lower limit position.
The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up win-
dow on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The Z-axis lower limit coordinate value is displayed
at the Y column of the NO. 9 line.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 9 is used exclusively for automatic tool length offset
and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
4765-E P-37
3-1-3. Designating the Operation Mode
As with a vertical tool, the basic operation mode for a horizontal tool is set using system variable
VFST.
The setting for system variable VFST is the same as that for a vertical spindle with the exception
that “1” is set for bit 6.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance

ME51326R0200300420001
Bit No. Setting Description

Bit 0
Bit 1 1
tion cycle in the Z-axis (radial) direction
tion cycle in the Z-axis (radial) direction after the execution of the auto-
matic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Y-
Bit 2 1 axis (tool length) direction.
To execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection cycle only in the Y-axis (tool length) direction, set “0” for both
Bit 1 and Bit 2
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a tool to the touch sensor
Bit 3 1
position.
Bit 4 0 Always set “0”
0
tion cycle for a vertical tool.
Bit 6
1
tion cycle for a horizontal tool.
Designates the relative offset type.
0 The tool length in reference to the reference tool used for zero point set-
ting of a work coordinate system is used as the tool length offset data.
Bit 7
Designates the absolute offset type.
1 The length of the tool from the spindle nose surface is regarded as the
tool length offset data
4765-E P-38
An example of VFST settings is given in the following table.
Relative/ X-axis Offset in Tool Length Automatic Tool Length

VFST
Model Absolute Movement Direction/Tool Radial Offset/Automatic Tool
Value
Offset Type Yes/No Direction Breakage Detection
Offset only in the tool
length direction Automatic tool breakage
#48H
detection
Relative Offset only in the tool
No Automatic tool breakage
offset radial direction #4AH
detection
Offset in the tool Automatic tool length offset #4DH
length direction then Automatic tool breakage
MCM the tool radial direction #4CH
detection
Horizon-
tal tool Automatic tool length offset #C9H
Offset only in the tool
length direction Automatic tool breakage
#C8H
detection
Automatic tool length offset #CBH
Absolute Offset only in the tool
No Automatic tool breakage
offset radial direction #CAH
detection
Offset in the tool Automatic tool length offset #CDH
length direction then Automatic tool breakage
the tool radial direction #CCH
detection
4765-E P-39
3-1-4. Setting the Zero Point of Horizontal Tool Touch Sensor
Set the zero point of the touch sensor for MCM horizontal tools in the manner indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Select the MDI mode and execute M144 to move the reference tool near the horizontal tool
touch sensor.
Since the procedure up to this step is the same as used for a vertical tool, refer to [2-1. Setting
the Touch Sensor Zero Point] for details.
• Setting the zero point for the tool length (Y-axis) direction touch sensor
CALL OO30 PAXI=#27H PLI=0 (or accurate reference tool length) (VFST= )
M02
• Setting the zero point for the tool radius (Z-axis) direction touch sensor
CALL OO30 PAXI=#47H PLI=0 (or accurate reference tool length) (VFST=**)
PZ=Accurate radius of the reference tool
M02
ME51326R0200300430001
The result of gauging is stored in the system work coordinate system No. 7 (zero point of
the tool length direction (Y-axis direction) touch sensor) and the system work coordinate
system No. 8 (zero point of the tool radius direction (Z-axis direction) touch sensor).
The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
[Supplement]
Before setting the zero point, index the swivel head to the following position.
Vertical tool: Front position (M73)
Horizontal tool: Right position (M76)
4765-E P-40
3-1-5. Automatic Tool Length Offset for Horizontal Tools
Automatic tool length offset for horizontal tools is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing automatic tool length offset for horizontal tools, make sure that the zero point of
the horizontal tool touch sensor has been set
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for " " by referring to [3-1-3. Designating the Operation Mode].
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset should be executed in the spindle.
• In the tool length (Y-axis) direction

CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) (PLI=Anticipated tool length)
M02
• In the tool radius (Z-axis) direction

CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) PZ=Anticipated tool radius
M02
• Both in the tool length (Y-axis) direction and the tool radius (Z-axis) direction
CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) PZ=Anticipated tool radius (PLI=Anticipated tool
length)
M02
sensor and the cutter radius compensation data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory.
The result of gauging can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/CUTTER
RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The obtained results are also
displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
4765-E P-41
3-1-6. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle for Horizontal Tools
Automatic tool breakage detection for horizontal tools is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing automatic tool breakage detection for horizontal tools, make sure that the zero
point of the horizontal tool touch sensor has been set.
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for " " by referring to [3-1-3. Designating the Operation Mode].
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection should be executed in the spindle.
• In the tool length (Y-axis) direction

CALL OO30 PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
• In the tool radius (Z-axis) direction

CALL OO30 PLEZ=Tool breakage judgment value PZ=Anticipated tool radius
(VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
• Both in the tool length (Y-axis) direction and the tool radius (Z-axis) direction
CALL OO30 PZ=Anticipated tool radius

PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (tool length direction)
PLEZ=Tool breakage judgment value (tool radius direction)
(VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
ME51326R0200300450001
sensor, and the tool length is calculated.
The function compares the obtained tool length to the tool length offset data stored in the
CNC memory and judges the tool has been broken if the difference is greater than the set
tool breakage judgment value.
The result of gauging is displayed at the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
[Supplement]
Before executing tool length offset/tool breakage detection for horizontal tools, index the swivel
head to the following position.
Vertical tool: Front position (M73)
Horizontal tool: Right position (M76)
All other supplements are the same as in the case of vertical tools.
4765-E P-42
3-2. Operation for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Break-

age Detection on B/C-axis Attachments, 90° Angular Attachments
and Extension Attachments (Option)
This subsection describes the functions of automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection for tools mounted in a B/C-axis attachment, 90° angular attachment, or extension attach-
ment.
(PAC = 90°)
(PAC = 180°)
(PAC = 0°)
Z+ (PAC = 270°)
Y+
X+
ME51326R0200300460001
Fig.1-1 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of 90° Angular Attachment
PAC = 90°
PAC = 180°
PAC = 0°
PAC = 270°
PAB
Z+
Y+
X+
ME51326R0200300460002
Fig.1-2 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of B/C-axis Attachment

4765-E P-43
[Supplement]
1) To use an attachment, index the PAB to 0° or 90°.

2) Call the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen and set the data dis-
played there on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen.
The correspondence between the items displayed on the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL
COMPENSATION screen and those on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION
screen is indicated below.
ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) ATTACHMENT SWIVEL

SWIVEL COMPENSATION COMPENSATION screen
screen
Data for PAC = 0 PAB = 0 H* in the LOWER (G185) screen
Data for PAC = 0 PAB = 90 H* in the FRONT (G181) screen
Data for PAC = 90 PAB = 90 H* in the LEFT (G182) screen
Data for PAC = 180 PAB = 90 H* in the REAR (G183) screen
Data for PAC = 270 PAB = 90 H* in the RIGHT (G184) screen
ME51326R0200300460003
H*: Attachment compensation numbers H1 to H8

If two B/C-axis attachments are used, set their data with separate compensation numbers.
4765-E P-44
3-2-1. Designating the Operation Mode
Use system variable “VFST” to designate the basic operation modes for automatic tool length offset
or automatic tool breakage detection.
Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated
once: it does not have to be set each time the MSB of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle is called.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance

ME51326R0200300470001

Bit 0
Bit 1 1
tion cycle in the tool radius direction.
tion cycle in the tool radius direction after the execution of the automatic
tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the tool
Bit 2 1
length direction.
To execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detec-
tion cycle only in the tool length direction, set “0” for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.
sensor position.
Bit 3 1
Set “1” for Bit 3 for machine models such as MCV in which the touch
sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.
Bit 4 0 Always set “0”
0 tion cycle for a vertical tool or a tool in the extension attachment or the B/
C-axis attachment (PAB = 0°).
Bit 6
1 tion cycle for a tool in the 90° attachment or the B/C-axis attachment
(PAB = 90°).
0 Designates the relative offset type.
Bit 7
1 Designates the absolute offset type.
4765-E P-45
3-2-2. Command Format
The command format used for calling the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection cycle for B/C-axis attachment, 90° attachment and extension attachment is indicated
below.
CALL(OO30 PAXI=*........) PAT=*
Conventional transfer variable

ME51326R0200300480001
PAT: Attachment swivel compensation number (Setting range: 1 to 7)
[Supplement]
1) The installation angle of the 90° angular attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°)
must be set to 270°.
2) The same sensor zero point is used for a vertical tool/extension attachment/90° attachment
(PAB = 0°) and a 90° attachment/B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°). Set the sensor zero point
so that gauging cycles can be executed without causing trouble for any attachment.
3-2-3. Designating the Attachment
The type of attachment to be used is designated by the setting for VFST, PAXI and PAT as indicated
below.
PAXI PAT
Bit 6 of VFST
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Command
Vertical spindle 0 0 0 0/1 None
Extension attachment
B/C-axis attachment 0 0 0 0/1 1 to 7
(PAB = 0°)
90° attachment
B/C-axis attachment 1 0/1 0/1 0 1 to 7
(PAB = 90°)
3-2-4. Movements of Tool in 90° Attachment/B/C-axis Attachment (PAB = 90°)
When a tool is mounted in the 90° attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°), the cycle is
executed in the same manner as for a tool mounted in the horizontal spindle of MCM.
In this case, however, the Z-axis lower limit position is determined taking into account the attach-
ment swivel compensation amount.
For details and supplemental information on the tool movements of a tool mounted in the 90° attach-
ment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°), refer to [3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic
Tool Breakage Detection Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM].
3-2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position
If breakage of a tool is detected (PGO = 2) after the execution of a tool breakage detection cycle, the
axes move to the tool change position.
The tool change position must be determined so that positioning at the tool change position will not
cause interference between the tool and a workpiece with any type of attachment (vertical tool, 90°
attachment, extension attachment, B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 0°, 90°)).
4765-E P-46
3-2-6. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position
To set the Z-axis lower limit position, add transfer variable PAT to the usual setting program.
CALL OO32 PAT=
PAT:Attachment swivel compensation number (Setting range: 1 to 7)
3-2-7. Setting the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data
To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function, the attachment
swivel compensation data must be correctly set.
Set the compensation data for the 90° attachment on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSA-
TION screen (G181 to G184) and the data for the extension attachment on the ATTACHMENT
SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G185).
3-2-8. Measuring the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data
Measure the attachment swivel compensation data for each type of attachment and each attach-
ment position by repeating the procedure indicated below and set the obtained data for the corre-
sponding item (G181 to G185) on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen.
Procedure :
1 Mount the reference tool to the spindle where no attachment is mounted and fix a micro-indica-
tor at the center of the table.
2 Manually move the X-, Y- and Z-axis to the position where the micro-indicator reads “0”.
3 Select a desired zero point and set the zero offset data.
Set “0” for the actual position data and take this position as the reference for the following oper-
ation.
4 Change the spindle tool to an attachment (90° attachment or extension attachment) and mount
the reference to the attachment.
5 Carry out positioning so that the micro-indicator reads “0” and set the coordinate values at that
position.
• 90° attachment
Index the attachment to four positions, 0° (front), 90° (left), 180° (back) and 270° (rear),
and carry out positioning at the individual attachment index positions.
• Extension attachment
Since the extension attachment is installed at a fixed angle, carry out positioning at the
preset angle.
6 Set the compensation data by displaying the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION

screen.
• Extension attachment
Set the coordinate values obtained in the operation in step 5) above on the ATTACHMENT
SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G185).
4765-E P-47
• 90° attachment
Calculate the compensation data for each index angle (PAC = 0, 90, 180, 270) based on
the coordinate values obtained in step 5) and set the calculated compensation data for the
corresponding setting item on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
(G181 to G184).
To calculate the compensation data at each attachment index angle, refer to [3-2-9. Calcu-
lating the Compensation Data for a 90° Attachment].
The correspondence between the PAC angle and setting items is indicated below.
PAC = 0: G181 (front) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 90: G182 (left) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 180: G183 (rear) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 270: G184 (right) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
Reference
tool
X
Y
Z
ME51326R0200300540001
4765-E P-48
An example of attachment compensation numbers

G181 G182 G183 G184 G185
(Front) (Left) (Rear) (Right) (Down)
(2 stations)
T301
H1 H1 H1 H1 -
(90° attachment)
T302
- - - - -
(attachment cover)
(3 stations)
T301
H1 H1 H1 H1 -
(90° attachment)
T302
- - - - -
(attachment cover)
T303
- - - - H3
(extension attachment)
(6 stations)
T301
- - - - H1
(extension attachment)
T302
- - - - -
(universal attachment)
T303
- - - - -
(special 90° attachment)
T304
H4 H4 H4 H4 -
(90° attachment)
T305 (blank) - - - - -
T306
- - - - -
(attachment cover)
4765-E P-49
3-2-9. Calculating the Compensation Data for a 90 Attachment
When a 90° attachment is used, it is necessary to find the attachment swivel compensation data
using the coordinate values obtained in step 5) of [3-2-8. Measuring the Attachment Swivel Com-
pensation Data].
The formula below are used to match the center of the vertical reference tool with the horizontal ref-
erence tool nose.
Vertical reference tool
Horizontal reference tool

ME51326R0200300550001
In the explanation below, D1 represents the diameter of the reference tool mounted in the vertical
spindle and D2 the diameter of the reference tool mounted in the horizontal spindle.
• PAC = 0°
D1
X' = X +
2 D1 D2
Y' = Y Vertical reference

tool
D2 Z+
Z' = Z +
2 X+
ME51326R0200300550002
• PAC = 90°
X' = X Z+
D1
Y' = Y + Y+
2
Vertical reference
D2 tool
Z' = Z +
2
ME51326R0200300550003
• PAC = 180°
D1
X' = X +
2 Z+
X+
Y' = Y
D2
Z' = Z +
2
ME51326R0200300550004
4765-E P-50
• PAC = 270°
X' = X
Z+
D1
Y' = Y + Y+
2
D2
Z' = Z +
2
ME51326R0200300550005
4765-E P-51
3-3. Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Break-

age Detection with 30° Angular Attachments (Option)
This subsection describes the functions of automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection for tools mounted in a 30° angular attachment.
3-3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function
The automatic tool length offset function allows the measurement of tool length offset data for a tool
mounted in the 30° angular attachment.
Note that this function cannot be used to measure the cutter radius compensation data while a tool
is mounted in the 30° angular attachment.
3-3-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function
The automatic tool breakage detection function allows detection of tool breakage or excessive wear
of a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment. As with the automatic tool length offset function,
this automatic tool breakage function is unable check breakage of a tool in the radius direction.
3-3-3. Operation Flow of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Function
Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the vertical spindle
↓
Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment
↓
Setting the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20])
↓
Setting the Z-axis lower limit position data
↓
Setting the zero point of the 30° angular attachment touch sensor
↓
Measuring the tool length offset data for a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment
.
.
.
Check the breakage of a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment
.
.
.
4765-E P-52
3-3-4. Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20])
To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function with an angular
attachment other than a 90° angular attachment(30°, 45°, 60°), a special referent tool, called refer-
ence tool B, is used to measure the attachment compensation data. Differing from the convention-
ally used reference tool - called reference tool A - which has a cylindrical shape, reference tool B
has a ball-shaped nose.
When setting the touch sensor zero point, the sensor zero point in the vertical and horizontal direc-
tions is usually determined by the length of reference tool A, which is determined by the specifica-
tion code (Bit 7 of specification code No. 24).
When setting the angular attachment touch sensor zero point, however, reference tool B is used to
set the zero point. This means the accurate length of the reference tool must be known beforehand.
The value used to calculate the length of reference tool B based on the length of reference tool A is
called the “relative offset data between reference tools”.
If a value is set for PLI, explained in [3-3-7. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point], setting the "rela-
tive offset data between reference tools" is not necessary.
The relative offset data between reference tools can be obtained easily by following the procedure
indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Mount reference tool B in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing
it into contact with the reference block.
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “B”.
2 Mount reference tool A in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing
it into contact with the reference block.
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “A”.
3 Calculate the relative offset data between reference tools using the following formula.
Relative offset data between reference tools = Length of reference tool B

(coordinate value B)
- Length of reference tool A
(coordinate value A)
ME51326R0200300600001
4765-E P-53
3-3-5. Designating the Operation Mode (VFST)
Use system variable “VFST” to designate the basic operation modes for automatic tool length offset
or automatic tool breakage detection operation for a 30° angular attachment.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.

ME51326R0200300610001

Bit 0
Moves the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor
position.
0 If this setting is made although the zero point of the touch sensor and the
Bit 3 X-axis has not been set, this will cause very dangerous situation since
positioning is made to the machine zero point in this case.
1
sensor position.
Bit 7
[Supplement]
Pay attention to the setting of system variable VFST since it is also used for the automatic tool
length offset/automatic tool breakage detection functions for a vertical tool, B/C-axis attachment,
extension attachment and 90° angular attachment.
Although the operation mode is backed up in the CNC memory, you are recommended to set the
mode for each execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection
functions since the setting is also used for other applications as described above.
4765-E P-54
3-3-6. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position (OO32)
When the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle is executed, a tool
must be brought into contact with the touch sensor at the right angle. Therefore, the tool is posi-
tioned in the direction in which the touch sensor is at the right angle before executing these cycles
with the 30° angular attachment tool. The point where the tool is positioned is called the “approach
start position”.
The position where the Y-axis should be retracted to avoid interference with a workpiece before
positioning to the approach start position is called the Z-axis lower limit position.
For details on the approach start position, refer to [3-3-7. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point].
The Z-axis lower limit position is also used as the spindle retraction position for sensor unit advance/
retract operation for models such as MCR-B II in which the sensor unit can interfere with the spindle
during sensor unit advance/retract operation.
Note that the set Z-axis lower limit position is used for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection function of the MCM horizontal tool and the B/C-axis attachment and 90° angu-
lar attachment. Therefore, if these specifications are used in combination, set the Z-axis lower limit
position with care.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set.
In this operation, the Z- and X-axis may be at any position.
2 At this position, execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode.
CALLOO32
When this program is executed, the axes do not move.
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Z-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 9 as the Z-axis lower limit position.
dow on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
4765-E P-55
3-3-7. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point
Before executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function using
the 30° angular attachment, it is necessary to set the zero point of the touch sensor.
Follow the procedure indicated below to set the touch sensor zero point.
Procedure :
1 Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode.

For this operation, only bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection) has significance. For
other bits “0” may be set.
2 Execute M144 (sensor unit advance) in the MDI or automatic mode.

Pay attention to the execution of M144 since the sensor unit may interfere with the spindle on
some models.
3 Mount reference tool B to the 30° angular attachment and orient the attachment.
4 Position the tool approximately 10 mm away from the touch sensor so that it will contact the
touch sensor at the right angle when it is moved in the tool length direction.
5 Select the MDI or automatic mode and execute the following program.
CALL OO34 PAXI=#07H
After the execution of the program above, the touch sensor zero point coordinate values (X, Y,
Z) are set using the designation for PAXI.
For details of PAXI designation, refer to [3-3-16. Variables].
Note the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20]) is used since PLI is not
designated.
[Supplement]
If PLI is designated, the value to be transferred differs depending on the tool length offset type
(VFST setting). For the absolute offset type, set the length of reference tool B from the gauge line
to PLI. In the case of the relative offset type, set the relative length of reference tool B in refer-
ence to reference tool A.
For details on the relative offset data between the reference tools, refer to [3-3-4. Relative Offset
Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20])].
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [3-3-8. Reference
Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting].
The result is fed back as the zero point data to system work coordinate system No. 13.
The set zero point data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
4765-E P-56
3-3-8. Reference Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
During the execution of the touch sensor zero point setting for a 30° angular attachment, the refer-
ence tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(1) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y- and Z-axis).
The approach start point is calculated on a line extended from the 30° angular attachment
touch sensor in the tool length direction. The following two positions are calculated on the
extended line: the position where the Z-axis is at the travel limit in the positive direction and the
position where the Y-axis is at the lower end limit position of the Z-axis. Of these two positions,
the position that is closer to the touch sensor is taken as the approach start point.
Since the sensor position has not been measured at the start of touch sensor zero point setting,
the position 10 mm ahead of the point where the tool was moved in step 4) of the operation
described in [3-3-7. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] is regarded as the 30° angular attach-
ment touch sensor position.
(3) The reference tool moves the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis).
(4) The sensor unit retracts.
(5) The sensor unit advances.
(6) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y-axis).
(7) The reference tool is brought into contact with the sensor (Z- and Y-axis).
(8) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Z- and Y-axis).
(9) The reference tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1)
(10) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1)

This completes the setting of the touch sensor zero point.
4765-E P-57
3-3-9. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function
To measure the tool length of the tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment, follow the procedure
indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing automatic tool length offset, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor
has been set.
Procedure :

For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits “0” may be set.
• Bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection)

Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
• Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid)

“0” (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in
the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
If “0” is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since
the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.
• Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection)

Since the operation to be performed is “automatic tool length offset”, “1” should be set
here.
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 30° angular
attachment and set the angular attachment direction.
If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is
unknown.
The obtained offset data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number transferred by
the PH parameter.
The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code com-
mand.
3 Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode.
CALL OO34 (PLI=Anticipated tool length) (PH=Tool number)
When the program is executed, the tool length is measured.
The measured tool length data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number trans-
ferred by PH. If no PH parameter is specified, the data is set as the tool length offset data of
the active tool number.
[Supplement]
If an anticipated tool length is not set, the minimum tool length is used as the anticipated tool
length.
Therefore, the minimum tool length must be set beforehand for optional parameter (long word)
No. 43, as an absolute value in mm units.
If the setting for this parameter is inappropriate, the 30° angular attachment may interfere with
the sensor unit. Set a value 10 mm longer than the minimum measurable length (determined by
the machine specification) as the minimum tool length.
If the minimum measurable length is set as the minimum tool length, the 30° angular attachment
will strike the sensor unit if the tool fails to contact the sensor.
4765-E P-58
3-3-10. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset
During the execution of automatic tool length offset for the tool mounted in the 30° angular attach-
ment, the tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(1) The Z-axis moves up 1 mm from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive (+) direc-
tion.
If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed.
(3) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis).
(4) The sensor unit advances.
(5) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis).
If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length position
(Z-, Y-axis).
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis).
(7) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis).
(8) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1)
(9) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1)
3-3-11. Tool Change Position Setting Function
When the automatic tool breakage detection cycle detects a tool has been broken, the broken tool
can be automatically returned to the magazine by using a subprogram.
When a tool is returned to the magazine, it may interfere with a workpiece, depending on the shape
of the workpiece. To avoid this, it is necessary to retract the workpiece. The tool change position
setting function is used to set the tool change position for this purpose.
The spindle is moved to the tool change position by X- and Y-axis movements. Note that whether or
not the X-axis moves is determined by the setting for bit 3 of VFST. The X-axis moves only when “0”
is set for this bit.
Procedure :
1 Move the spindle to the desired tool change position on the Y-axis.
If the setting that enables X-axis movements is made, move the X-axis also.
CALL OO31
The axes will not move at all even when a program is executed.
After the execution of the program, the actual position is set for system work coordinate system
No. 2 as the tool change position.
The set tool change position data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET
(VSZO [N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
4765-E P-59
3-3-12. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Automatic tool breakage detection is executed in the manner indicated below for the tool mounted in
the 30° angular attachment.
[Supplement]
Before executing automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the touch
sensor has been set.
Procedure :

For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits “0” may be set.
• Bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection)

Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
• Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid)

“0” (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in
the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
If “0” is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since
the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.
• Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection)

Since the operation to be performed is “automatic tool length offset”, “1” should be set
here.
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 30° angular
attachment and set the angular attachment direction.
If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is
unknown.
The function compares the measured data to the tool length offset data of the tool offset num-
ber transferred by PH to judge breakage of the tool.
The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code com-
mand.
CALL OO34 (PLE1=Tool breakage judgement value)

(PLE2=Offset value update permissible amount)
(PGO=Processing at the occurrence of tool breakage)
ME51326R0200300680001
• Tool breakage judgment value (PLE1)

If no value is set for PLE1, the judgment value is taken to be 0.1 mm.
The tool is judged to be broken if the absolute value of the difference between the preset
tool length and the measured tool length is larger than the judgment value set for PLE1.
• Offset value update permissible amount (PLE2)

When a value is set for PLE2, the present tool length offset data is updated to the mea-
sured tool length assuming that the absolute value of the difference between the preset
tool length and the measured tool length is smaller than the judgment value set for PLE1
and larger than the offset value update permissible amount.
4765-E P-60
• Processing on occurrence of tool breakage (PGO)

If a tool is detected to have been broken while no value is set for PGO, an alarm occurs
and the tool breakage detection cycle ends without returning the broken tool to the maga-
zine.
If a value is set for PGO to select the processing on occurrence of tool breakage, the spec-
ified processing is executed without generating an alarm when tool breakage is detected.
PGO = 1: The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change posi-
tion.
PGO = 2: The tool is returned after positioning to the tool change position.
PGO = 3: The tool is not returned to the magazine.
Since no alarm occurs if a value is set for PGO, it is necessary to judge tool breakage in a
program.
For details on judgment of tool breakage in a program, refer to [3-3-14. Judgment for Tool
Breakage].
3-3-13. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
During the execution of the automatic tool breakage detection for the tool mounted in the 30° angu-
lar attachment, the tool moves as indicated below.
Procedure :
1 The Z-axis moves up 1 mm from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive (+) direc-
tion.
If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed.
2 The spindle is oriented.
3 The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis).
4 The sensor unit advances.
5 The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis).

If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length posi-
tion (Z-, Y-axis).
6 The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis).
7 The tool is assessed for breakage.
8 The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis).
9 The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1)
10 The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1)

The processing after the detection of tool breakage depends on the setting for PGO.
• PGO = 1:
The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change position.
• PGO = 2:
The tool is returned after positioning of the X- and Y-axis to the tool change position.
4765-E P-61
3-3-14. Judgment for Tool Breakage
When a spare tool is selected on detection of tool breakage, the machine is not stopped by an alarm
even if the breakage of a tool is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge whether or not a tool is
broken at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch a part program accord-
ing to the result of the judgment.
• System variable VOK1

VOK1 = 1: The tool is not broken.
VOK1 ≠ 0: The tool is broken.
System variable VOK1 stores the result of the tool breakage detection cycle executed immedi-
ately before its designation.
• System variable VOK2

System variable VOK2 is also used for storing the result of the tool breakage detection cycle.
Differing from system variable VOK1, it indicates the occurrence of tool breakage in all detec-
tion cycles executed after it has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected even
once in these cycles, the value of VOK2 is not 0 (VOK2 ≠ 0).
• VOK1 and VOK2 are not reset by resetting the CNC.
3-3-15. Resetting the Tool Breakage Status
The tool number of the tool which has been judged to be broken in a tool breakage detection cycle is
registered as a broken tool by the tool management function.
To use the same tool number after replacing the broken tool with a new one, it is necessary to reset
the registered broken tool status.
For the procedure for resetting this status, refer to Tool Management Function in the special specifi-
cations of the Operation Manual.
4765-E P-62
3-3-16. Variables
Variables used in the subroutines that execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection for the 30° angular attachment.
PH: Tool offset number
Used to designate a tool offset number if a tool offset number different from the tool num-
ber of the active tool is used for automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection.
PAXI: One byte (8 bits) transfer variable used when the sensor zero point is set. Each bit has
the following meaning.
PAXI Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ME51326R0200300720001
Bit No. Description

Bit 0 Sets the X-axis zero point.
Bit 1 Sets the Y-axis zero point.
Bit 2 Sets the Z-axis zero point.
Bit 3 Always set “0”.
VFST: Designates the operation mode. For details refer to [3-3-5. Designating the Operation
Mode (VFST)].
PLE1: Designates the tool breakage judgment value. For details refer to [3-3-12. Automatic
Tool Breakage Detection].
PLE2: Designates the offset value update permissible amount. For details, refer to [3-3-12.
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].
PLI: Designates the length of the reference tool when setting the touch sensor zero point.
Designates the anticipated tool length when measuring the tool length.
PRS: This is an RS command for multi-point spindle orientation operation.
PRET: Touch sensor retraction preventive command
This is a function to prevent touch sensor retraction at the end of the touch sensor zero
point setting, automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection.
PGO: Designates the processing to be followed on detection of tool breakage. For details,
refer to [3-3-12. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].
PX: Designates the displacement in the X-axis direction during positioning to the sensor posi-
tion.
4765-E P-63
4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)

During execution of automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation) or tool breakage
detection on the vertical or horizontal spindle of MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A, the tool may interfere
with the touch sensor unit cover.
With VH-40, execution of automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection may also cause
interference between the table and the touch sensor unit.
In order to prevent such interference, the Y-axis escape cycle should be executed after setting the Y-
axis escape position.
4-1. Setting the Y-axis Escape Position
4-1-1. Setting the Y-axis Escape Position for the Vertical Spindle
Set the Y-axis escape position for the vertical spindle (includes VH-40) by following the procedure
indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the desired Y-axis escape position.

CALL OO33
M02
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Y-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 12 as the Y-axis escape position.
4765-E P-64
4-1-2. Setting the Y-axis Escape Position for the Horizontal Spindle
Set the Y-axis escape position for the vertical spindle by following the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the desired Y-axis escape position.

ALL OO32
M02
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Y-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 9 as the Y-axis escape position.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate systems No. 9 and No. 12 are used exclusively for automatic tool
length offset (cutter radius compensation) and automatic tool breakage detection functions, they
cannot normally be set or referenced.
CAUTION
Set the Y-axis escape position at a position where interference between the tool and the touch
sensor unit cover will not occur.
4765-E P-65
4-2. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset (Cutter

Radius Compensation)/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
4-2-1. Movements of the Vertical Spindle Tool
During execution of the automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle for the vertical spindle tool (includes VH-40), the tool moves as indicated
below.
Machine operation
(2) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the Y-axis escape position (the position set at system
work coordinate system No. 9).
(4) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back* once and then moves forward.
* The sensor unit does not move back if it is already at the retract end position.
sensor.
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor according to the selected cycle (automatic
tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle).
[Supplement]
With the VH-40, since the touch sensor zero point in the Y-axis direction is set at the same posi-
tion as the Y-axis escape position, only the X-axis moves in step 5).
4765-E P-66
4-2-2. Movements of the Horizontal Spindle Tool
During execution of the automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle for the horizontal spindle tool, the tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(4) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back* once and then moves forward.
* The sensor unit does not move back if it is already at the retract end position.
sensor.
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor according to the selected cycle (automatic
tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle).
4765-E P-67
5. Interference Prevention Measures for MCV-A/MCV-A II

During Execution of the Automatic Tool Length Offset/
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
This function prevents interference between the touch sensor and the coolant trough, and between
the spindle tool and the chip cover, during the execution of the automatic tool length offset (cutter
radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the MCV-A/MCV-A II.
To make this function valid, set “1” for CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 4.
5-1. Touch Sensor Operation Interlock

A notch is provided in the coolant trough and the touch sensor zero point is set above the notch to
prevent interference of the coolant trough with the touch sensor.
Touch sensor advance is enabled only at the touch sensor zero point. If the M144 command (touch
sensor advance) is executed although the X-axis is not at the touch sensor zero point, the touch
sensor does not move and the following alarm occurs.
The touch sensor can be advanced only through the notched part.
2437 Alarm B Improper M code 5
The X-axis touch sensor zero point described here is the position set by touch sensor zero point set-
ting in the Z-axis direction and means the X-axis coordinate value in the system work coordinate
system No. 1.
5-2. Measures against Interference during Execution of the Automatic

Tool Length Offset/Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
In order to avoid interference between the tool and the chip cover, the X-axis touch sensor zero
point must be set at the center of the notch provided in the chip cover so that the tool crosses the
chip cover through that point.
5-2-1. Provisional Setting of the X-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point
Since the M144 command (touch sensor advance) is invalid unless the X-axis is located at the touch
sensor zero point, the provisional X-axis zero point must be set before setting the X-axis touch sen-
sor zero point.
Note that this setting is not necessary when adjusting a touch sensor zero point that has already
been set.
Procedure :
1 Move the X-axis by manual operation to align the touch sensor with the center of the notch in
the coolant trough.
2 Select the MDI mode and execute “VFST= ”.

For " " set an appropriate value by referring to [6-3. Explanation of Variables]. Here, the
operation mode may be either automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detec-
tion.
3 Select the MDI mode and execute “VSZOX[1]=VRCOX-VMOFX”.
4 Execute M144.
4765-E P-68
5-2-2. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point
Set the touch sensor zero point in the Z direction by designating “PAXI=7”.
5-2-3. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Before executing the automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection cycle, set “0” for bit 3 of
VFST to enable X-axis movement.
VFST setting for the execution of the automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detec-
tion cycle
• Relative offset
Automatic tool length offset: 1
Automatic tool breakage detection: 0
• Absolute offset
Automatic tool length offset: #81H
Automatic tool breakage detection: #80H
This instruction manual specifies that the tool moves to the touch sensor position during the execu-
tion of an automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection cycle in the following sequence:
Z-axis upper limit → Y-axis touch sensor position → X-axis touch sensor position.
In this order of tool movements, however, the tool will interfere with the chip cover.
The setting indicated above changes the order to:
Z-axis upper limit → Z-axis touch sensor position → Y-axis touch sensor position.
Similarly, if “PGO = 2” is designated, the order of tool movements to the tool change position (the
position set by the execution of OO31), where the tool moves after the detection of tool breakage, is
changed to:
Z-axis upper limit → Y-axis tool change position → X-axis tool change position.
4765-E P-69
6. Variables Used in Subprograms

The basic command format of the automatic tool length offset function and the automatic tool break-
age detection function was explained in the previous subsections.
In this subsection, the variables necessary to make effective use of these functions are described.
6-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables
Variable
Subpro- Variables for which a
Variables for which a which
gram Numerical Value Should be
Numerical Value Must be Set Must not
Name Set as Needed
be Used
Setting of Z-axis OO30 PAXI: PLI: Accurate tool length None
touch sensor zero =3 Setting of X- and Y- of reference tool
point axis zero points used in setting the
=4 Setting of Z-axis zero point
zero point PRS: Spindle orientation
=7 Setting of X-, Y- and angle
Z-axis zero points PRET: Sensor does not
VFST: Operation mode =1 retract.
PH: Tool length offset
number
PD: Cutter radius com-
pensation number
Setting of Y-axis OO30 PAXI: PRS: Spindle orientation None
touch sensor zero =#17H Setting of X-, Y- and angle
point Z-axis zero points PRET:
VFST: Operation mode =1 Sensor does not
PLI: Accurate tool length retract.
of reference tool PH: Tool length offset
used in setting the number
zero point PD: Cutter radius com-
PY: Accurate cutter pensation number
radius of reference
tool used in setting
the zero point
Setting of tool OO31 None None None
change position
(Not necessary
for MC-H)
4765-E P-70
Variable
Name Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic tool OO30 VFST: Operation mode PLI: Anticipated tool PAXI
length offset PY: Approximate dis- length
placement of tool PX: Approximate dis-
nose in the Y-axis placement of tool
direction from the nose in the X-axis
center of the spindle direction from the
(i.e., cutter radius) center of the spin-
Always set when dle+/- values are
executing Y-axis possible.
automatic tool offset PY: Approximate dis-
placement of tool
nose in the Y-axis
direction from the
center of the spindle
PFA: Feedrate for the
movement from the
sensor to under-
travel point, PUDT
(safety distance)
PF1: Skip feedrate for the
first contact detec-
tion cycle
second contact
detection cycle
PRS: Spindle orientation
angle
PRET:
=1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
pensation number
4765-E P-71
Variable
Name Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic tool OO30 VFST: Operation mode PX: Approximate dis- PAXI
breakage detec- PY: Approximate displacement of the tool
tion placement of the tool nose in the X-axis
nose in the Y-axis direction from the
direction from the center of the spindle
center of the spindle +/- values are possi-
(i.e., cutter radius) ble.
Always set when PY: Approximate dis-
executing Y-axis placement of the tool
automatic tool break- nose in the Y-axis
age detection direction from the
+/- values are possi-
ble.
PLE1: Z-axis direction tool
breakage judgment
value
PLEY: Y-axis direction tool
breakage judgment
value
PLE2: Offset value update
permissible amount
PGO: Processing on
occurrence of tool
breakage
angle
PRET:
=1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
pensation number
movement from the
sensor to the under-
travel point, PUDT
(safety distance)
tion cycle
second contact
detection cycle
4765-E P-72
6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools)
Variable
Name Set as Needed
be Used
Setting of tool OO30 PAXI: PLI: Accurate tool length None
length direction =#23H Setting of X- and Y- of reference tool
touch sensor zero axis zero points used in setting the
point =#24H Setting of Z-axis zero point
(Y-axis) zero point PRS: Spindle orientation
=#27H Setting of X-, Y- and angle
Z-axis zero points PRET:
VFST: Operation mode =1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
pensation number
Setting of tool OO30 PAXI PRS: Spindle orientation None
radius direction =#47H Setting of X-, Y- and angle
touch sensor zero Z-axis zero points PRET:
point VFST: Operation mode =1 Sensor does not
(Z-axis) PLI: Accurate tool length retract.
of reference tool PH: Tool length offset
used in setting the number
zero point PD: Cutter radius com-
PZ: Accurate cutter pensation number
radius of reference
tool used in setting
the zero point
Z-axis lower limit OO32 None None None
setting
4765-E P-73
Variable
Name Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic tool OO30 VFST: Operation mode PLI: Anticipated tool PAXI
length offset PZ: Approximate dis- length
placement of tool PX: Approximate dis-
nose in the tool placement of tool
radius direction (Z- nose in the X-axis
axis direction) direction from the
Always set when center of the spindle
executing automatic PZ: Approximate dis-
tool length offset in placement of tool
the tool radius direc- nose in the Z-axis
tion direction from the
movement from the
travel point, PUDT
(safety distance)
tion cycle
second contact
detection cycle
angle
PRET:
=1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
pensation number
4765-E P-74
Variable
Name Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic tool OO30 VFST: Operation mode PX: Approximate dis- PAXI
breakage detec- PZ: Approximate displacement of tool
tion placement of tool nose in the X-axis
nose in the tool direction from the
radius direction (Z- center of the spindle
axis direction) PZ: Approximate dis-
Always set when placement of tool
executing automatic nose in the Z-axis
tool length offset in direction from the
the tool radius direc- center of the spindle
tion PLE1: Tool length direction
(Y-axis direction) tool
breakage judgment
value
PLEZ: Tool radius direction
(Z-axis direction) tool
breakage judgment
value
PLE2: Offset value update
permissible amount
PGO: Processing on
occurrence of tool
breakage
angle
PRET:
=1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
pensation number
movement from the
travel point, PUDT
(safety distance)
tion cycle
second contact
detection cycle
4765-E P-75
6-3. Explanation of Variables

The following describes how the variables given in the tables in [6-1. Table of Subprograms and
Variables] and [6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools)] are used.
Note the numerical values must be in the units presently in use.
(1) VFST (V FIRST)
• VFST sets the basic operation mode for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool
breakage detection cycles.
• Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be desig-
nated once: it does not have to be set each time OO30 is called.
• The automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection cycles can be exe-
cuted even in the same part program. In this case, set “1” for bit 0 of VFST when execut-
ing an automatic tool length offset cycle. To execute an automatic tool breakage detection
cycle, set “0” for bit 0 of VFST.
• VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.
ME51326R0200300870001

Bit 0
Executes an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
Bit 1 1
breakage detection cycle in the tool radius direction.
breakage detection cycle in the Y-axis direction after the
execution of an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
Bit 2 1 breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis direction.
To execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle only in the Z-axis direction, set “0”
for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool
at the touch sensor position.
Bit 3 1 Set “1” for Bit 3 with machine models such as MCV, MCM
and MCR in which the touch sensor is installed indepen-
dently of the X-axis movement.
Does not execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic
0
tool breakage detection cycle for MCM horizontal tools.
Bit 6
1
breakage detection cycle for MCM horizontal tools.
Bit 7
4765-E P-76
(2) PLE1 (P LENGTH ERR 1)
• This indicates the tool breakage judgement value and must be set as an absolute value.
• A tool is judged to have been broken if:

PLE1 < | (Preset tool length offset data) - (Measured tool length) |
• If PLE1 is not set when executing a tool breakage detection cycle, 0.1 mm is automatically
set for PLE1 in the subprogram.
(3) PLE2 (P LENGTH ERR 2)
• This indicates the permissible offset update value and must be set as an absolute value.
• If tool breakage is not detected in a tool breakage detection cycle and the following condi-
tion is satisfied, the tool length offset data is updated according to the measured tool
length.
PLE2 < | (Preset tool length offset data) - (Measured tool length) | < PLE1
• As the tool length offset data is updated each time the cycle is executed, it must be care-
fully attended to in reference to the occurrence of tool breakage. When PLE2 is not set,
the tool length offset data is not updated.
(4) PLEY (P LENGTH ERROR Y-AXIS)
• This indicates the tool breakage judgement value in the Y-axis direction and must be set as
an absolute value.
• A tool is judged to have been broken if:

PLE1 < | (Preset cutter radius compensation data) - (Measured cutter radius) |
• If PLE2 is not set when executing a tool breakage detection cycle, 0.1 mm is automatically
set for PLE1 in the subprogram.
(5) PAXI
• This designates the axis for which the touch sensor zero point is set.
• PAXI consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.
PAXI Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ME51326R0200300870002
4765-E P-77
Bit No. Description

Bit 0 Sets the X-axis zero point.
Bit 1 Sets the Y-axis zero point.
Bit 2 Sets the Z-axis zero point.
0: Sets the zero point of the tool length direction touch sensor for a vertical
tool.
Bit 4
1: Sets the zero point of the tool radius direction touch sensor for a vertical
tool.
Sets the zero point of the tool length direction touch sensor for a horizontal
Bit 5
tool.
Sets the zero point of the tool radius direction touch sensor for a horizontal
Bit 6
tool.
Setting value of PAXI
Sensor Direction
Vertical Tool MCM Horizontal Tool
Axis Name
Length Direc- Radius Direc- Length Direc- Radius Direc-
tion Sensor tion Sensor tion Sensor tion Sensor
Setting of X- and Y-axis zero
3 (#13H) #23H (#43H)
points
Setting of Z-axis zero point 4 (#14H) #24H (#44H)
Setting of X-, Y- and Z-axis
7 #17H #27H #47H
zero points
(6) PX
• This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool
(spindle) in the X-axis direction. Designation of plus and minus values is possible. When
PX is not set, “PX = 0” is automatically set in a subprogram.
• When the X- and Y-axis move to the center of the touch sensor during automatic tool length
offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the tool is positioned PX away from the cen-
ter of the touch sensor so that the tool nose is aligned with the center of the touch sensor.
• Since the touch sensor is installed close to the travel limit, pay attention to the setting of PX
in reference to the travel limit.
(7) PY
This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle)
in the Y-axis direction. For other details, refer to the explanation for “PX”.
When setting the Y-axis zero point, an accurate cutter radius (displacement of the tool nose in
the Y-axis direction) of the reference tool used for zero point setting must be set for PY.
4765-E P-78
(8) PZ
This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle)
in the Z-axis direction. For other details, refer to the explanation for “PX”.
(9) PLI
• When setting the touch sensor zero point

Set the reference tool length for PLI.
• Relative offset type

Set the length of the reference tool used for touch sensor zero point setting in relation
to the length of the tool used for setting the zero point of the work coordinate system.
When no setting is made, it is automatically assumed that “PLI = 0”.
• Absolute offset type

Set the length of the reference tool used for touch sensor zero point setting from the
tool nose surface.
When no setting is made, it is automatically assumed that “PLI = 150 mm” or “PLI =
200 mm”. Which of the values is used is determined by the machine model.
• When executing the automatic tool length offset cycle

Set the anticipated tool length for PLI.

Set the relative length of the tool in reference to the reference tool (200 mm or 150
mm).
This corresponds to dimension “a” (Tool length - Reference tool length) in the illustra-
tion below.

Set the length of the tool between the spindle nose (gauge line) and the tool nose.
This corresponds to dimension “b” in the illustration below.
Reference tool
a b
Spindle nose surface
ME51326R0200300870003
When the tool set in the spindle moves toward the touch sensor, it advances to an
imaginary position 10 mm beyond the position where it would come into contact with
the touch sensor. If PLI is not set, the minimum tool length set for CNC optional
parameter (long word) No. 43 is taken as the tool length.
4765-E P-79
(10) PFA/PF1/PF2
These designate the approach or skip feedrate for tool movements toward the sensor.
• PFA: Feedrate for the movement from the sensor to the undertravel point, PUDT (safety
distance)
• PF1: Skip feedrate for the first contact detection cycle
• PF2: Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle

PFA without PLI Override valid
(anticipated tool length)
• When PFA command is not designated:
F=PF1 (automatic tool length offset)
F4000 (automatic tool breakage detection)
• When PFA command is designated:
F=PFA (automatic tool breakage detection)
PFA with PLI Override valid
(anticipated tool length)
• When PFA command is not designated:
F4000 (automatic tool breakage detection)
• When PFA command is designated:
F=PFA
Skip feedrate for the first contact Override valid
detection cycle
• When PF1 command is not designated:
F2000
• When PF1 command is designated:
F=PF1
Skip feedrate for the second Override invalid
contact detection cycle
• When PF2 command is not designated:
F1000
• When PF1 command is designated:
F=PF2
(11) PGO(P GO)

This determines the processing to be followed after the detection of tool breakage. Selection is
possible from “alarm-stop” and “spare tool selection”.
• When PGO is not set:

When a tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the
CNC stops in the alarm state after the completion of the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle.
• When the setting is “PGO = 1”:

When a tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the
broken tool is returned to the magazine after the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
completed. Then, the execution part program is continued.
With MC-V and double-column machining centers, the tool change cycle is executed at the
X, Y coordinate positions where the cycle has been executed; therefore, do not set “PGO =
1” for these models.
4765-E P-80

This setting is not allowed for MC-H.
With MC-H, do not set PGO as “2”.
If tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the X- and
Y-axis move to the preset tool change position (Y-axis moves first and then the X-axis) after
the completion of the tool breakage detection cycle. Then, the broken tool is returned to
the magazine and the execution of the part program is continued.
The tool change position must be set beforehand by executing the tool change position set-
ting cycle.

Even when tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle,
the part program is executed continuously after the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle.
If the setting for PGO is “1”, “2” or “3”, regardless of whether or not the broken tool is
returned to the magazine, the CNC does not stop even if tool breakage is detected and a
part program continues to be executed after the completion of the tool breakage detection
cycle.
Therefore, it is necessary to judge if the tool is broken or not in a part program and follow
the necessary processing if a tool is found to have been broken.
The result of the tool breakage detection cycle is set for system variable VOK1.
VOK1 = 1: Tool has not been broken.
VOK1 ≠ 1: Tool has been broken.
If a measurement impossible alarm occurs, whatever setting is made for PGO, the CNC is
alarm-stopped after the automatic tool breakage cycle is completed.
CAUTION
1) Setting “PGO = 1” is not allowed with MC-V and double-column machining centers. This set-
ting can cause interference between the tool or the tool change arm and the workpiece if a tool
change cycle starts after an automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
2) Setting “PGO = 2” is not allowed for MC-H. This setting can cause interference between the
tool or the spindle and the workpiece in Y- or X-axis movement that follows an automatic tool
breakage detection cycle.
4765-E P-81
(12) PRS (P RS)

When using a special tool, a boring bar for example, the tool bit can fail to contact the touch
sensor if the spindle is orient stopped at the preset position. In such cases, it is necessary to
index the spindle to the desired angular position. PRS is used to set the desired spindle index
angle for such cases.
Example:In the case of the tool shown below, set “270” for PRS to index the spindle to allow tool
bit to contact the touch sensor.
Tool
Y+ Y-
Sensor
ME51326R0200300870004
Execute “CALL OO30 PRS = 270”
Y+ Y-
ME51326R0200300870005
[Supplement]
Spindle orientation is automatically executed at the travel end of the Z-axis in the positive direc-
tion.
(13) PRET (P RETRACT)

With the retract type touch sensor, the sensor retracts after the completion of a cycle. If “1” is
set for this variable, the cycle completes with the sensor at the advanced position.
(14) PH/PD
• Offset data (tool length offset data, cutter radius compensation data) are usually set and
referenced for the offset number identical to the actual tool number. By setting PH and/or
PD, the offset data can be set for the desired offset number.
PH: Tool length offset number (default: actual tool number)
PD: Cutter radius compensation number (default: PH number)
• Setting range: 1 to The number of tool data sets
[Supplement]
Even when only cutter radius compensation is executed, it is necessary to set both PH and PD
since the tool length offset data is also referenced.
4765-E P-82
(15) VLTL (Maximum tool length)

The maximum tool length VLTL, used for the automatic tool offset and automatic tool breakage
detection cycles, is added to the system parameters. The operational step 4) in [Fig. 1-1 Cycle
Time Reduction Function] becomes valid according to the setting for this parameter:
• Optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 3

1: Valid
0: Invalid (initial setting)
• Optional parameter (long ward) No. 44: Max. tool length data
For the maximum tool length, set the maximum tool length among the tools that will be
used.
Setting range: 0 to 999
Unit: mm
Initial setting: 0 (may be changed)
[Supplement]
Because the initial setting for the maximum tool length is “0”, an appropriate value must be set for
VLTL.
(16) PUDT (Undertravel distance (Safety clearance))

When a tool is moved towards the sensor, its feedrate is switched from a high speed to a low
speed. The position where the feedrate is switched is set for this variable in terms of the dis-
tance from the sensor to the tool nose. See [Fig. 1-1 Cycle Time Reduction Function].
Designate this variable when calling the subprogram.
If PUDT is not set, the following value is regarded as the undertravel distance.
• Automatic tool length offset cycle

Both PLI and PFA are designated: 50 mm
Either PLI or PFA is not designated: 10 mm
• Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

Undertravel distance: 5 mm
(17) POVT (Overtravel distance (Sensor damaging prevention distance))

This is provided to prevent breakage of the sensor if the sensor fails to function when the tool
contacts it.
Set the distance from the assumed sensor contact position to the position where axis feed
should stop if the sensor fails to operate.
Designate this variable when calling the subprogram. If POVT is not set, “10 mm” is automati-
cally set for it.
4765-E P-83
7. Cautions on Operation
(1) Because the sensor will not work properly if its zero point is not set, be sure to set the sensor
zero point by executing the sensor zero point setting cycle when the machine is installed. For
MCM, the zero point setting cycle must be executed for the horizontal spindle touch sensor.
• The sensor zero point is set for system work coordinate system No. 1 (Z-axis sensor) and
system work coordinate system No. 4 (Y-axis sensor).
• System work coordinate systems No. 1 and No. 4 are exclusive to automating specifica-
tions and can neither be set by parameter setting nor referenced.
• System work coordinate systems No. 1 and No. 4 can only be checked by displaying the
MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up window in the GAUGING RESULT display
screen.
(2) When setting “PGO = 2” with MC-V or a double-column machining center, make sure that the
tool change position setting cycle has been executed.
The tool change position for the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is set for system work
coordinate system No. 2. System work coordinate system No. 2 is exclusive to automating
specifications and can neither be set by parameter setting nor referenced.
(3) An emergency stop limit switch is built into the system to protect the touch sensors. This limit
switch stops axis movement if a sensor is pushed in too far.
If this happens, the emergency stop limit indicating lamp in the control panel lights up. To
release the emergency stop condition, select the manual mode, set the emergency stop limit
release switch to valid, and retract the sensor by moving the axis with the pulse handle in the
direction in which the limit switch is released.
(4) Do not call out the automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram
while there is a remaining shift amount in manual interruption operation or while the machine is
still in the mirror image mode. If a subprogram call is attempted, a “measuring impossible”
alarm occurs.
(5) As the automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions are used in
combination with the tool management function, the operator must become fully acquainted
with the tool management function by reading its manual thoroughly before using these func-
tions.
(6) The explanations in this manual relate to tools that have the cutting nose at the front edge, such
as drills, taps and reamers. For tools whose cutting edge is off the center of the spindle, like
boring bars, variables PRS and PX or PY must be set in accordance with the tool nose offset
direction.
(7) The automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions cannot be
used for tools whose tool holder comes into contact with the touch sensor or touch sensor unit
before the tool nose does.
(8) Numerical values must be assigned to subprograms in the presently used unit system.
Note that the real number unit system must not be used.
(9) The cutter radius compensation mode and the local coordinate system are cancelled when an
automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram is executed and,
once cancelled, they are not restored after the completion of the subprogram.
4765-E P-84
(10) Call automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection subprograms in a work
coordinate system. An alarm occurs if a subprogram is called in the machine coordinate sys-
tem. Note that a work coordinate system cannot be altered during the execution of an automatic
tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram.
(11) Do not use the user area as the area for storing programs, work coordinate systems, tool offset
data and common variables, automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection
subprograms.
(12) The allowable number of nesting levels of subroutines in an automatic tool length offset or tool
breakage detection subprogram is two. This means that the maximum allowable nesting level
is six when these functions are executed.
(13) Manual advance/retraction operation of the tool breakage detection unit (touch sensor)
With MCM and MCR, the touch sensor can be manually moved forwards and backwards.
a. Set the CNC operation panel mode selecting key-lock type switch to ON to enable inde-
pendent manual operation.
b. Set the selector switch to FORWARDS.
c. Press the CYCLE START button.

The cover will open and the touch sensor will move forward when the CYCLE START but-
ton is released.
d. Set the selector switch to BACKWARDS.
e. Press the CYCLE START button.

The touch sensor will move backward and the cover will close when the CYCLE START
button is released.
f. Set the CNC operation panel mode selecting key-lock type switch to OFF to disable inde-
pendent manual operation.
(14) An alarm usually occurs if the actual tool number is “0” when a tool length offset or cutter radius
compensation cycle is executed. Therefore, you are recommended to carry out a tool change
in the MDl or automatic mode in this case.
4765-E P-85
8. Program Examples
8-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset

T2 T6
PY=30
Drill Boring bar
ME51326R0200300890001
N1 T2
N2 M6
N3 T6
N4 CALL OO30VFST=1(PLI=40)(PF1=1000) ............. Tool length offset cycle for T2

N5 M6 PLI ................................................................... Anticipated tool length (relative length)
in reference to the standard tool
N6 T5 PF1 ................................................................... First approach feedrate
N7 CALL OO30 PY=30................................................ Tool length offset cycle for T6
N8 M6 PY..................................................................... Tool nose offset amount from the
spindle center (Y direction) = 30 mm
:
:
ME51326R0200300890002
4765-E P-86
N1 T2
N2 M6
N3 T6
N4 CALL OO30 VFST=#81H (PLI=240) (PF1=1500) ...... Tool length offset cycle for T2
N5 M6 PL1 ........................................................................ Anticipated tool length
(absolute length)
N6 T5
N7 CALL OO30 PY=30 ......................................................Tool length offset cycle for T6
N8 M6
:
:
ME51326R0200300890003
Commands in ( ) may be omitted.

It is not necessary to set variable VFST every time a tool length offset cycle is called. As has been
explained, the touch sensor zero point must be set before the execution of an automatic tool length
offset cycle. For the setting of the touch sensor zero point, select the same offset type (relative or
absolute) as the type used for the automatic tool length offset cycle.
4765-E P-87

• Alarm stop
T3
PY=30
Boring bar
ME51326R0200300900001
N1 T1 .............................. T1: Drill

N2 M6
N3 T3 .............................. T3: Boring bar
N4 S300
N5 G81 G56 X40 Y20 Z-30 R3 F80 H1
:
:
:
N12 CALL OO30 VFST=0 (PLE1=0.2)*1 (PLE2=0.05) .. Tool breakage detection cycle for T1
N13 M6
N14 T2 PLE1 ................................................................... Tool breakage judgment value
= 0.2 mm
N15 G0 X30 Y10 .............................................................. If no tool breakage judgment value is
set, "0.1 mm" is automatically set as
the tool breakage judgment value.
:
N29 CALL OO30 PY=30 (PLE1=0.1) ............................... Tool breakage detection cycle for T3
Off-center amount of tool nose:
30 mm
:
:
:
ME51326R0200300900002
Commands in ( ) may be omitted.

4765-E P-88
When the tool is judged “broken”, i.e., when the measured tool length is smaller than the set tool
breakage judgment value, the operation stops in an alarm state on completion of the cycle (Z-axis
positioned at travel end in the positive direction).
*1: Tool length offset data is updated when variable “PLE2” is set.
When the tool length measured in the tool breakage detection cycle is 0.051 mm to 0.2 mm
(the range set by “PLE1” and “PLE2”) shorter than the initial tool length measured in the auto-
matic tool length offset cycle, the tool length offset data is automatically updated based on the
tool length measured in the tool breakage detection cycle to compensate for the tool wear
amount.
When no “PLE2” data is set, the tool length offset data is not updated.
• Automatic spare tool selection (MC-H)
T1 T3
PY=30
Drill Boring bar
ME51326R0200300900003
4765-E P-89
N1 T1 .............................. T1: Drill

N2 M6
N3 T3 .............................. T3: Boring bar
N4 G0 X40 Y10 S300
N5 G56 Z40 H1* M3
:
:
:
N18 CALL OO30 VFST=0 (PLE1=0.1) PGO=2 ...... Tool breakage detection cycle for T1 Tool
breakage judgment value
= 0.1 mm
N19 IF [VOK1 NE 0] N999 ..................................... Jump to N999 if tool is judged "broken"
VOK1: Judgment for tool breakage
N20 M6
N21 T9
N22 G0 X100 Y20
N23 G56 Z20 H3 :
:
:
N42 CALL OO30 PY=30 PGO=2 ........................... Tool breakage detection cycle for T3
N43 IF [VOK1 NE 0] N999 ...................................... Tool breakage judgment value
= 0.1 mm
Tool nose offset amount from the spindle
center = 30 mm
:
:
N999 M60 ............................................................... Pallet change command
Part program for the next workpiece ....................... If a broken tool is called in this program,
a spare tool is automatically selected
rom the same tool group.
At the same time as the spare tool is
selected, the tool offset data is rewritten to
the offset data of the selected spare tool.
The cutter radius compen sation data is
rewritten also.
ME51326R0200300900004
It is not necessary to set variable VFST every time an automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
called.
*: HA may be designated instead of H1. For details, refer to special specifications of the Operation
Manual.
4765-E P-90
9. Alarm List
Name of Alarm Probable Cause Measures to Take

UNTENDED: At the end of the gauging impossible Refer to the Gauging Impossible Cause
gauging impossible message, the cause code is displayed. Code List and eliminate the cause.
(ALARM-B 2305)
ALARM-B
2305 UNTENDED:
gauging impossible ××
↑
Cause code
UNTENDED: An attempt is made to execute the tool Check the VFST setting.
no subprogram function breakage detection cycle although the
(ALARM-B 2311) corresponding specification is not sup-
ported.
UNTENDED: Tool breakage is detected in the tool
tool breakage breakage detection cycle.
(ALARM-B 2309)
Direct of subscript Tool number is “0”. When a tool is changed manually, the
(ALARM-B 2231) PH and/or PD setting is wrong. active tool number must be set.
UNTENDED: • The PAT command value is out of
command missing the specifiable range (outside the
(ALARM-B 2308) range 1 to 7).
• Wrong PAC command
• The PAT command is not desig-
nated although “1” is set for VFST,
bit 6.
Plus travel limit over The value assigned to PLI is too large. Do not set a value larger than the maxi-
(ALARM-B 2268) mum measurable tool length for PLI.
For the allowable maximum length of
the tool to be measured, refer to your
final machine/control specifications.
The value set for the zero point of the Set the touch sensor zero point again.
touch sensor is incorrect. Be sure to use the same offset type (rel-
The touch sensor zero point has been ative/absolute) for the setting and mea-
set in the relative offset type but measurement.
surement is executed in the absolute off-
set type, or the touch sensor zero point
has been set in the absolute offset type
but measurement is executed in the rel-
ative offset type.
4765-E P-91

Minus travel limit over The value set for CNC optional parame- Do not set a value smaller than the mini-
(ALARM-B 2269) ter (long word) No. 43 (measurable min- mum measurable tool length for CNC
imum tool length) is too small. optional parameter (long word) No. 43.
For the minimum allowable length of the
tool to be measured, refer to your final
machine/control specifications.
The value assigned to PLI is too small. Do not specify a value smaller than the
minimum measurable tool length for PLI.
For the maximum allowable length of
the tool to be measured, refer to your
final machine/control specifications.
The touch sensor zero point has been Set the touch sensor zero point again.
set in the relative offset type but mea- Be sure to use the same offset type (rel-
surement is executed in the absolute off- ative/absolute) for the setting and mea-
set type, or the touch sensor zero point surement.
has been set in the absolute offset type
but measurement is executed in the rel-
ative offset type.
Gauging Impossible Cause Code List <Alarm B>
Code Used Subpro-

Probable Cause Measures to Take
(HEX) grams
1 A maker subprogram is called while Call a maker subprogram after select- OO10
the machine coordinate system (H0) is ing a work coordinate system (G15 H1, OO30
selected. for example). OO50
2 The mirror image function is active. Cancel the mirror image function first. OO10
OO30
OO50
3 Manual shift amount (total) remains. Cancel the manual shift amount (total) OO10
to zero. OO30
OO50
4 In the G11 mode (parallel or rotation Cancel the G11 mode first. OO10
shift of a coordinate)
5 In the G51 mode (graphics enlarge- Cancel the G51 mode first. OO10
ment/reduction)
6 T number is zero (0), or no tool is set. • Specify a T number. OO30
• Specify the PTLN command.
7 Specified T number or PTLN com- Specify a T number or PTLN command OO30
mand is larger than the maximum off- within the allowable range.
set number.
8 The power to the probe is not on when Check the following: OO15
the flash on cycle is attempted.
• Is there any obstacle between the
receiver head and the probe?
• Is the spindle index angle for the
probe correct?
• Does the receiver head flash?
4765-E P-92
Code Used Subpro-

(HEX) grams
9 The offset amount of the positioning When positioning the Y and Z axes, OO30
point for cycle start from the touch sen- position them within the range of
sor zero point is greater than PCHK PCHK from the touch sensor zero
(only for Y and Z axes). point.
A The touch probe microcomputer stays Check whether chips are accumulating OO10
on. on the proximity switch.
B The result of the touch probe test is Check the touch probe battery. OO10
NG.
The touch probe signal cannot be con-
firmed.
C The touch probe contacts the work- With the FM type touch probe, recep- OO10
piece while it is being fed at a rapid tion of signals is not correct.
approach feedrate (X-axis).
• Gauging cycle start point
• PUDT setting
D The touch probe fails to contact the When using the FM type touch probe, OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at a signal reception is not correct.
middle approach feedrate (X-axis).
• POVT setting
E The touch probe fails to contact the Check the touch probe battery. OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at the
final approach feedrate (X-axis).
When using the FM type touch probe,
signal reception is not correct.
F The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has chat- OO10
although the touch probe is brought tered.
into contact with a workpiece (X-axis).
10 The touch probe contacts the work- Check the following: OO10
piece while it is being fed at a rapid
approach feedrate (Y-axis). When
using the FM type touch probe, signal • PUDT setting
reception is not correct.
11 The touch probe fails to contact the Check the following: OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at a
middle approach feedrate (Y-axis).
When using the FM type touch probe, • POVT setting
12 The touch probe fails to contact the Check the touch probe battery. OO10
final approach feedrate (Y-axis).
13 The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has chat- OO10
approach feedrate (Z-axis). When
4765-E P-93
Code Used Subpro-

(HEX) grams
middle approach feedrate (Z-axis).
final approach feedrate (Z-axis).
into contact with a workpiece (Z-axis).
18 The touch probe contacts the work- Check the following items: OO10
piece during the approach to the exter-
• Start point of the gauging cycle
nal diameter in the OD gauging cycle.
• Assumed OD value
19 PLH is not designated. Set tool length offset number for PLH.
1A PDH is not designated. Set the cutter radius compensation
number for PDH.
1B In the C-axis gauging cycle, contact is Check the following items: OO10
detected during the approach to the
• Is start point of the C-axis gauging
gauging point.
cycle correct?
• Is PDl value correct?
• Is PGI value correct?
1C Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
X-axis direction motion within the
range of PUDT and POVT. (contact
value error)
1D Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
Y-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1E Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
Z-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1F In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
for the vertical spindle longitudinal close to the touch sensor
direction, the cutting tool fails to con- (within 10 mm)?
tact the sensor.
20 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
for the vertical spindle radial direction, close to the touch sensor
the cutting tool fails to contact the sen- (within 10 mm)?
sor.
21 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start position of the cycle; is OO30
for horizontal spindle longitudinal it close to the touch sensor
tact the sensor.
4765-E P-94
Code Used Subpro-

(HEX) grams
22 In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
automatic tool breakage detection close to the touch sensor
cycle for the horizontal spindle in the (within 10 mm)?
radial direction, the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
23 When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the OO100
positive direction from the contact
detect point, the probe contact signal
has already been on. (X direction)
24 When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the
has already been on. (Y direction)
has already been on. (Z direction)
26 When the axis returns 0.5 mm from the
contact position detected after
approach (X direction), the value is
taken as the coordinate value in the
workpiece gauging direction again.
approach (Y direction), the value is
approach (Z direction), the value is
29 In the automatic tool length offset/ Check if the anticipated tool length is OO30
automatic tool breakage detection correct. (for tool length offset cycle)
cycle for the vertical spindle in the lon-
gitudinal direction, the cutting tools
fails to contact the sensor.
2B In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
automatic tool breakage detection
• Is the anticipated tool length cor-
cycle for the horizontal spindle in the
rect? (for tool length offset cycle)
longitudinal direction, the cutting tool
fails to contact the sensor. • Is the cutter radius offset data set?
(for tool breakage detection cycle)
2C In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
• Is the anticipated cutter radius
cycle for the vertical spindle in the
correct? (for tool length offset
cycle)
contact the sensor.
• Is the cutter radius offset data set?
4765-E P-95
Code Used Subpro-

(HEX) grams
2D In the automatic tool length offset cycle Check if PL1 is appropriate. OO30
in the X-axis direction (with angular
attachment), the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
33 In the U-center zero setting cycle, the Check the following items:
cutting bit contacts the sensor, or the
• Is the sensor zero point set cor-
contact signal is input, in a sequence
rectly?
in which the cutting bit should not con-
tact the sensor. • Is the cutting bit free of chips?
• Is the sensor signal correct?
34 In the U-center zero setting cycle, no Check the following items:
contact signal is input.
• Is PD value correct?
• Is the sensor signal correctly input
to the CNC?
35 In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check the following items:
the cutting bit contacts the touch sen-
• Is the command value correct?
sor while the Y-axis is being fed in a
sequence in which contact must not be • Is the sensor signal correctly input
detected. to the CNC?
• Is the cutting bit free of chips?
the cutting bit fails to contact the touch
• Is the U-axis command too large?
sensor.
to the CNC?
37 In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
the cutting bit fails to contact the touch input to the CNC.
sensor in the sequence in which the U-
axis adjusted amount is checked on
the Y-axis.
38 In the tool breakage detection cycle, Check the following items:
rectly?
sequence in which contact must not be
detected. • Is the sensor signal correctly input
to the CNC?
39 In the tool wear compensation cycle, Check the following items:
sor in a sequence in which the Y-axis
positioning is executed to a point dis- • Is the U-center bit free of chips?
tanced from the current position by the
compensation amount.
to the CNC?
3A In the tool wear compensation cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
sensor in a sequence in which the cut-
ting bit radial position is corrected in
the U-axis adjusting cycle.
4765-E P-96
Code Used Subpro-

(HEX) grams
3B After the completion of U-axis com- Check if the sensor signal is correctly
pensation in the tool wear compensa- input to the CNC.
tion cycle, the cutting bit fails to
contact the touch sensor in the
sequence in which the adjusted
amount is checked in the Y-axis move-
ment.
3C When the gauging cycle is executed Execute the gauging cycle after index- OO10
with a touch probe set in the vertical ing the swivel head to the M75 (rear)
spindle of the MCM, swivel head is not position.
in the M75 (rear) position.
3D In the touch sensor zero setting cycle • Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the vertical spindle in the longitudi- the swivel head to the M73 (front)
nal direction on the MCM, the swivel position.
head is not in the M73 (front) position,
or the horizontal spindle is being used.
• Check if the PAXI data is correct.
3E In the touch sensor zero setting cycle • Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the vertical spindle in the radial the swivel head to the M73 (front)
direction on the MCM, the swivel head position.
is not in the M73 (front) position, or the
horizontal spindle is being used.
• Check if the PAXI data is correct
3F In the touch sensor zero setting cycle • Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the horizontal spindle in the longitu- the swivel head to the M76 (right)
dinal direction on the MCM, the swivel position.
head is not in the M76 (right) position,
40 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle • Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the horizontal spindle in the radial the swivel head to the M76 (right)
is not in the M76 (right) position, or the
41 The tool number for the angular Check if the T command is correct.
attachment is T52 or T53. (For the
angular attachment tool, only T51 (90°
angular attachment) can be used for
tool length offset).
42 The power supply for the optical type OO16
touch probe cannot be turned on. OO18
touch probe cannot be turned off. OO19
4765-E P-97
SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION
1. Overview
The automatic gauging function automatically checks the dimensions of a workpiece by executing a
subprogram. The touch probe with the same shank shape as the cutting tool is mounted in the spin-
dle and brought into contact with the gauging face of the workpiece to read the coordinate values of
the contact point. The workpiece dimension is then automatically calculated using these coordinate
values.
The results of gauging are displayed on the screen. It is also possible to judge if the gauging result
is acceptable or not in a part program. A function to output the results of gauging to the printer is
provided as an option.
It is possible to set the zero offset of any work coordinate system based on the results of gauging.
The automatic gauging function is classified into the following two major function types.
• Dimension check function
• Automatic zero offset function (includes the dimension check function)
1-1. Dimension Check Function

The following four gauging patterns are provided for the dimension check function.
(1) Inner diameter (ID) gauging

This function automatically measures the center position and the workpiece inner diameter.
The results can be evaluated.
(2) Outer diameter (OD) gauging

This function automatically measures the center position and the workpiece outer diameter.
(3) End face gauging

This function automatically measures the end face position in any of the following directions: X-
axis, Y-axis and Z-axis directions.
(4) Calculation of the center and distance between two points

This function calculates the center and the distance between two points measured in any of the
three patterns (1) to (3) described above.
Since the results obtained from the gauging cycle (gauging results) are automatically compared
with the theoretical values (anticipated values) and the difference calculated to judge whether or
not the gauging result is acceptable, this function can be used for the following purposes.
• Controlling the workpiece dimensions
• Recognizing the workpiece type (or pallet table)
• Confirming the zero point
1-2. Automatic Zero Offset Function

The automatic zero offset function offsets the zero point so that the coordinate values of the position
where the dimension check was executed will be the desired coordinate values.
In this way, zero offset is possible for any required work coordinate system.
4765-E P-98
2. Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function

The following flowchart shows the operating procedure of the automatic gauging function.
Is the machine No
model MCM?
Yes
No Is the touch probe Execute these steps once a week to maintain the
mounted in the accuracy of automatic gauging.
vertical spindle? In addition to this compensation/offset at regular
intervals, you are recommended to execute these
Yes procedures when a new touch probe is set in the
magazine.
Setting the zero point of the Zero point setting of the datum hole is necessary
datum hole only when a touch probe is mounted in the vertical
spindle (horizontal spindle for MC-H).
Checking the ON/OFF state of

the touch probe
Executing the radius compen-

sation for the touch probe
Executing the length offset for

the touch probe
Execute this function for controlling workpiece

Checking the workpiece dimensions, judging workpiece kinds or offsetting
dimension the zero point automatically.
Execute this function to automatically offset the

Automatic zero offset zero point according to the results of the dimension
check function.
ME51326R0200400040001
[Supplement]
The explanation in this section assumes that the functions are executed in the automatic mode.
Therefore, the programs necessary in each step of the operation must be prepared. Use the pro-
gram edit function to prepare these programs.
4765-E P-99
2-1. Setting the Datum Hole Zero Point

The datum hole zero point needs to be set only when mounting a touch probe in the horizontal spin-
dle (in the case of MC-H) or the vertical spindle (in the case of MC-V).
If a touch probe is mounted in the horizontal spindle of MCM, zero point setting must not be per-
formed.
Procedure :
1 Mount a datum hole block (master ring) that has an accurately measured φ20 mm or larger
diameter hole in it.
2 Accurately align the datum hole center with the spindle center using sling gauge or similar tool.
Use the pulse handle for this operation.
3 Set the zero point.
4 Select the MDI mode and execute positioning to the zero point at a rapid feedrate. At the zero
point, check the measured value again.
5 Move only the Z-axis in the positive (+) direction to remove the sling gauge and mount the
touch probe in the spindle.
6 Move the Z-axis in the negative (-) direction to the position where the touch probe ball enters
the datum hole.
7 Move the Z-axis so that the touch probe ball enters the datum hole 5 to 7 mm from the datum
block upper face.
8 Select the MDI mode and execute the following program.

CALL 0021
M02
When this program is executed, the zero point is set so that the actual position of the touch
probe will be X=0, Y=0, Z=0 of system work coordinate system No. 3.
4765-E P-100
The result of setting can be confirmed by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-
up window in the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The set X, Y and Z values are displayed at X,
Y and Z columns of the NO. 3 line.
ME51326R0200400050001
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 3 is used exclusively for the automatic gauging func-
tion, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-up window, refer to SEC-
TION 1 [1-3-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key].
4765-E P-101
2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation

The following describes how the touch probe radius is corrected.
To maintain high gauging accuracy, touch probe radius compensation must be executed at least
once a week.
2-2-1. Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation
The general operating procedure for touch probe radius compensation is described below.
For touch probe radius compensation for the MCM horizontal spindle, refer to [2-2-3. Touch Probe
Radius Compensation Operation (MCM Horizontal Spindle)].
CAUTION
If the radius compensation cycle for the touch probe is executed before setting the zero point of
the datum hole, the machine will operate unpredictably.
Execute the touch probe radius compensation cycle only after setting the datum hole zero point.
Procedure :
1 Execute the datum hole zero point setting cycle.
2 In the MDI mode, specify “VNCOM[1] = 8” and touch the probe by hand to check if the contact
detection signal is correctly turned ON and OFF.
The ON/OFF state of the contact detection signal can be checked by displaying the ACTUAL
POSITION screen or by observing the indicator lamps on the operation panel.
3 Mount the touch probe in the spindle.
4 Select the automatic mode and execute the following program.

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=(Datum hole diameter) POVT=3
M02
The command must be specified in the presently selected unit system.
When the program is executed, the touch probe automatically enters the datum hole and the
radius compensation cycle is executed.
How the touch probe moves during the execution of the radius compensation cycle is
explained in [2-2-2. Touch Probe Movements during Touch Probe Radius Compensation
Cycle].
The results of the cycle are set for the tool radius compensation number indicated below.
Direction
System Variable Radius Compensation
Data
X+ VSTOD [1]
X- VSTOD [2]
Y+ VSTOD [3]
Y- VSTOD [4]
Z+ -
Z- VSTOD [5]
4765-E P-102
The set data can be checked by opening the MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB
CUTR COMP. (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, shown below.
ME51326R0200400070001
For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1
[1-3-2-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key].
After making sure that the touch probe radius compensation data is set for the tool radius com-
pensation number, proceed to the steps below.
5 Using the hole where the touch probe radius compensation cycle has been executed, execute
the ID gauging cycle.
For the ID gauging cycle, refer to [2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function].
6 On the GAUGING RESULT display screen, compare the anticipated center value with the mea-
sured center value to confirm that the difference is less than several micrometers.
7 Remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge instead.
8 Turn the sling gauge at the measured center position and compare the measured center value,
sling gauge reading and anticipated center value. Make sure that differences among these
three values are less than several micrometers.
This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation.
[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively for the
automatic gauging function, they cannot normally be set or referenced.
4765-E P-103
2-2-2. Touch Probe Movements during Touch Probe Radius Compensation Cycle
During the execution of the touch probe radius compensation cycle, the touch probe moves as indi-
cated below.
Machine operation

Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch
probe signal.
For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation].
(3) The X- and Y-axis move to the center of the datum hole at a rapid feedrate.
(4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate until the touch probe ball reaches a point 30 mm
away from the datum hole.
(5) The Z-axis moves down 30 mm further at a rapid feedrate and the touch probe ball enters the
datum hole.
(6) Datum hole gauging cycle is executed in the following sequence: X+ direction, X- direction, Y+
direction and Y- direction.
4765-E P-104
2-2-3. Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation (MCM Horizontal Spindle)
The operating procedure for touch probe radius compensation is described below for the touch
probe mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle.
For general touch probe radius compensation, refer to [2-3-1. Touch Probe Length Offset Opera-
tion].
Procedure :
1 Mount a datum hole block (master ring) that has an accurately measured φ20 mm or larger
diameter hole in it.
2 Accurately align the datum hole center with the spindle center using sling gauge or similar tool.
Use the pulse handle for this operation.
3 Set the zero point.

To do this, select the zero point setting mode and enter the data using the keyboard.
4 Select the MDI mode and execute positioning to the zero point at a rapid feedrate. At the zero
point, check the measured value again.
5 Move only the Z-axis in the positive (+) direction to remove the sling gauge, and mount the
touch probe in the spindle.
At the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) in the TOOL DATE SET screen mode,
set HORIZONTAL TOOL USED for ACTUAL TOOL NO.
6 Move the Z-axis in the negative (-) direction to the position where the touch probe ball enters
the datum hole.
7 Move the Z-axis so that the touch probe ball enters the datum hole 5 to 7 mm from the datum
block upper face.
8 In the MDI mode, specify “VNCOM[1] = 8” and touch the probe by hand to check if the contact
detection signal is correctly turned ON and OFF.
The ON/OFF state of the contact detection signal can be checked by displaying the ACTUAL
POSITION screen or by observing the indicator lamps on the operation panel.
9 Mount the touch probe in the spindle.

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=(Datum hole diameter) POVT=3
M02
The command must be specified in the presently selected unit system.
When the program is executed, the touch probe automatically enters the datum hole and the
radius compensation cycle is executed.
How the touch probe moves during the execution of the radius compensation cycle is
explained in [2-2-4. Touch Probe Movements during Touch Probe Radius Compensation Cycle
(MCM Horizontal Spindle)].
[Supplement]
To allow the CNC to automatically recognize the direction of the touch probe, the touch
probe must be mounted in the spindle in the automatic or MDI mode.
4765-E P-105
The results of the cycle are set for the tool radius compensation number indicated below.
Direction
Radius Com-
System Variable
pensation Data
M73 (Front) M74 (Left) M75 (Rear) M76 (Right)
X+ - VSTOD [9] VSTOH [3] VSTOD [17]
X- VSTOH [1] VSTOD [10] - VSTOD [18]
Y+ VSTOD [7] VSTOH [2] VSTOD [15] -
Y- VSTOD [8] - VSTOD [16] VSTOH [4]
Z+ VSTOD [6] VSTOD [11] VSTOD [13] VSTOD [20]
Z- VSTOD [5] VSTOD [12] VSTOD [14] VSTOD [19]
ME51326R0200400090001
For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [1-
3-2-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key].
After making sure that the touch probe radius compensation data is set for the tool radius com-
pensation number, proceed to the steps below.
11 Using the hole where the touch probe radius compensation cycle has been executed, execute
the ID gauging cycle.
For the ID gauging cycle, refer to [2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function].
12 On the GAUGING RESULT display screen, compare the anticipated center value with the mea-
sured center value to confirm that the difference is less than several micrometers.
13 Remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge instead.
4765-E P-106
14 Turn the sling gauge at the measured center position and compare the measured center value,
sling gauge reading and anticipated center value. Make sure that differences among these
three values are less than several micrometers.
This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation for the touch probe mounted in
the MCM horizontal spindle.
[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively used for
the automatic gauging function, then cannot normally be set or referenced.
2-2-4. Touch Probe Movements during Touch Probe Radius Compensation Cycle
(MCM Horizontal Spindle)
During the execution of the touch probe radius compensation cycle for the touch probe mounted in
the MCM horizontal spindle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.
Machine operation

probe signal.
(2) The gauging cycle is executed for the datum hole in the sequence indicated below.
Gauging Order
Touch Probe Direction
1 2 3 4
M73 (Front) Y+ Y- Z+ Z-
MCM M74 (Left) X+ X- Z+ Z-
Horizontal
spindle M75 (Rear) Y+ Y- Z+ Z-
M76 (Right) X+ X- Z+ Z-
(3) The Z-axis moves to and stops at the center of the datum hole.
4765-E P-107
2-3. Touch Probe Length Offset

The following describes how the touch probe length is offset.
To maintain high gauging accuracy, touch probe length offset must be executed at least once a
week.
Reference tool
PLI (Approximate length offset data of the touch

probe in reference to the reference tool)
PEI (Coordinate value of the Z-axis

Workpiece gauging face)
ME51326R0200400110001
2-3-1. Touch Probe Length Offset Operation
The operating procedure for touch probe length offset is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the X-, Y- and Z-axis so that the touch probe comes to the end face where the gauging
cycle is to be executed.
For this positioning, use a part program (manual or MDI mode operation is also allowed).
The distance between the touch probe ball and the gauging face can be any desired distance.
CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=(Z-coordinate value of gauging face)

PLI=(Approximate touch probe length offset data)
M02
ME51326R0200400120001
When the program is executed, the length offset data of the touch probe is automatically mea-
sured.
The offset data is calculated so that the result of the gauging cycle executed at the same gaug-
ing face will be the value set for PEI and set for system length offset number 5.
For MCM, the offset data is set for system length offset numbers 1 to 5 as indicated below
Direction
No. MCM Horizontal Tool
Vertical Tool
M73 (Front) M74 (Left) M75 (Rear) M76 (Right)
Tool Length Off-
VSTOH [5] VSTOH [1] VSTOH [2] VSTOH [3] VSTOH [4]
set No.
How the touch probe moves during the execution of the touch probe length offset cycle is
explained in [2-2-2. Touch Probe Movements during Touch Probe Radius Compensation
Cycle].
4765-E P-108
ME51326R0200400120002
This completes the touch probe length offset operation.
[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively for
the automatic gauging function, then cannot normally be set or referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [1-3-2-
3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key].
2-3-2. Touch Probe Movements during Touch Probe Length Offset Cycle
During the execution of the touch probe length offset cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.
Machine operation

probe signal.
(2) The touch probe moves to the gauging face to measure the gauging face.
(3) The touch probe moves in the length direction and stops at the previous position.
The touch probe does not move in the radius direction for the execution of the touch probe
length offset cycle.
4765-E P-109
2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function

The ID gauging function automatically measures the center position and the diameter of the target
hole.
This function can evaluate the result of gauging at the same time.
2-4-1. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Operation
The ID gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball at the anticipated center position of the target hole using a part
program.

CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=(Anticipated hole diameter)
M02
3 When this program is executed, the ID gauging cycle is automatically executed.

If a touch probe is mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle, the function automatically recog-
nizes the touch probe direction and executes the ID gauging cycle accordingly.
[Supplement]
To allow the CNC to automatically recognize the touch probe direction, the touch probe must
be mounted in the spindle in the automatic or MDI mode.
How the touch probe moves during the execution of the ID gauging cycle is explained in [2-4-2.
Touch Probe Movements during Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Cycle].
The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-3.
Displaying the Result of Gauging].
ME51326R0200400150001
4765-E P-110
4 Retract the touch probe using a part program.

This completes the ID gauging operation.
Example program
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z50 H1
M130
R100 G1 Z-5 F1000
M131
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=200
G0 Z500
M02
H1: Touch probe tool length offset data
ME51326R0200400150002
2-4-2. Touch Probe Movements during Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Cycle
During the execution of the ID gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.
Machine operation

probe signal.
(2) The function measures the hole ID by moving the touch probe in the following sequence of
directions: X+, X-, Y+, Y-, X+ and X-.
For the MCM, the order of axis movements depends on the touch probe direction as indicated
below.The touch probe stops at the center of the hole obtained as the result of the ID gauging
cycle.
Touch Probe Direc- Gauging Order
tion 1 2 3 4 5 6
Vertical Spindle X+ X- Y+ Y- X+ X-
M73 Y+ Y- Z+ Z- Y+ Y-
(Front)
M74 X+ X- Z+ Z- X+ X-
MCM (Left)
Horizontal
spindle M75 Y+ Y- Z+ Z- Y+ Y-
(Rear)
M76 X+ X- Z+ Z- X+ X-
(Right)
(3) The touch probe stops at the center of the hole obtained as the result of the ID gauging cycle.
The touch probe lengthwise direction axis does not move during the execution of the ID gaug-
ing cycle.
4765-E P-111
2-5. Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Function

The OD gauging function automatically measures the center position and the diameter of a work-
piece.
2-5-1. Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Operation
The OD gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball to the anticipated center position of the target outer diameter
using a part program.
In this positioning, move the touch probe ball to a point approximately 10 mm away from the
gauging point.

CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=(Anticipated outer diameter) *PIN=(Infeed direction feed distance)
M02
* PZIN may be used instead of PIN.
For argument PIN (PZIN), specify a relative value (a positive incremental value).
3 When the program is executed, the OD gauging cycle is automatically executed.

How the touch probe moves during the execution of the ID gauging cycle is explained in [2-5-2.
Touch Probe Movements during Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Cycle].
ME51326R0200400180001
4765-E P-112

This completes the OD gauging operation.
Example program
G0 X0 Y0
0
10
G56 Z10 H1
R
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=200 PZIN=15
G0 Z500
M02
Touch probe
PIN(PZIN)
In this program, positioning of the Z-axis is

executed at a rapid feedrate.
ME51326R0200400180002
4765-E P-113
2-5-2. Touch Probe Movements during Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Cycle
During the execution of the OD gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.
Touch probe
a
PIN(PZIN) b
c Workpiece OD
ME51326R0200400190001
Machine operation

probe signal.
(2) The function measures the hole ID by moving the touch probe in the following sequence of
directions: X+, X-, Y+, Y-, X+ and X-.
For the MCM, the order of axis movements depends on the touch probe direction as indicated
below.
Touch Probe Direc- Gauging Order
tion 1 2 3 4 5 6
Vertical Spindle X+ X- Y+ Y- X+ X-
M73 Y+ Y- Z+ Z- Y+ Y-
(Front)
M74 X+ X- Z+ Z- X+ X-
MCM (Left)
Horizontal
spindle M75 Y+ Y- Z+ Z- Y+ Y-
(Rear)
M76 X+ X- Z+ Z- X+ X-
(Right)
(3) The touch probe stops at the center obtained as the result of the OD gauging cycle.
4765-E P-114
2-6. End Face Gauging Cycle

The end face gauging cycle automatically measures the end face position in any of the following
directions: X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis directions.
2-6-1. X-axis End Face Gauging Operation
The X-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball near the target X-axis end face using a part program.
gauging point.

CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=(Anticipated X-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of X-axis movement is automatically determined
and the X-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
How the touch probe moves during the execution of the X-axis end face gauging cycle is
explained in [2-6-2. Touch Probe Movements during X-axis End Face Gauging Cycle].
ME51326R0200400210001
4765-E P-115

This completes the X-axis end face OD gauging operation.
Example program
G0 X-120 Y0
100 G56 Z50 H1
Touch probe
M130
G1 Z-5 F1000
M131
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=-100
PEI G0 Z500
M02
ME51326R0200400210002
2-6-2. Touch Probe Movements during X-axis End Face Gauging Cycle
During the execution of the X-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.
Machine operation

probe signal.
(2) The X-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The X-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that Y- and Z-axis do not move during the X-axis end face gauging cycle.
4765-E P-116
2-6-3. Y-axis End Face Gauging Operation
The Y-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball near the target Y-axis end face using a part program.
gauging point.

CALL OO10 PMOD=2 PEI=(Anticipated Y-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of Y-axis movement is automatically determined
and the Y-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
How the touch probe moves during the execution of the Y-axis end face gauging cycle is
explained in [2-6-4. Touch Probe Movements during Y-axis End Face Gauging Cycle].
ME51326R0200400230001

This completes the Y-axis end face OD gauging operation.
4765-E P-117
2-6-4. Touch Probe Movements during Y-axis End Face Gauging Cycle
During the execution of the Y-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.
Machine operation

probe signal.
(2) The Y-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The Y-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that X- and Z-axis do not move during the Y-axis end face gauging cycle.
2-6-5. Z-axis End Face Gauging Operation
The Z-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Machine operation
(1) Position the touch probe ball near the target Z-axis end face using a part program.
gauging point.
(2) Select the automatic mode and execute the following program.
CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=(Anticipated Z-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of Z-axis movement is automatically determined
and the Z-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
How the touch probe moves during the execution of the Z-axis end face gauging cycle is
explained in [2-6-6. Touch Probe Movements during Z-axis End Face Gauging Cycle].
ME51326R0200400250001
4765-E P-118
(3) Retract the touch probe using a part program.

This completes the Z-axis end face OD gauging operation.
2-6-6. Touch Probe Movements during Z-axis End Face Gauging Cycle
During the execution of the Z-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.
Machine operation

probe signal.
(2) The Z-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The Z-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that X- and Y-axis do not move during the Z-axis end face gauging cycle.
4765-E P-119
2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results

The results obtained from the gauging cycle are stored in the CNC memory, and are updated to the
new results when the next gauging cycle is executed.
This data storage area where the data is updated every time a gauging cycle is executed is called A
memory.
The CNC memory also has an extra area in which all the results obtained from previous gauging
cycles are stored; it can be accessed as required. This data storage area is called B memory.
The procedure for transferring the contents in A memory to B memory is explained below.
Procedure :
1 Execute a gauging cycle for the first gauging point.

The result of the gauging cycle is stored to A memory.
2 Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. This is an example program
applicable when the gauging point is on an inner diameter.
CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=3
After the execution of the program, the data in A memory and that in B memory are swapped
and the data in A memory is saved in B memory.
Axes do not move even if the gauging result data is saved in B memory.
The setting for argument PAXI differs depending on the type of gauging cycle. See the table
below for this setting.
Gauging Cycle Type PAXI = Data Stored in A Memory

3 Center point of X- and Y-axis
Center point of X- and Z-axis
ID gauging 5
(Only for MCM horizontal spindle)
OD gauging
Center point of Y- and Z-axis
6
(Only for MCM horizontal spindle)
X-axis end face gauging 1 Gauging point on X-axis end face
Y-axis end face gauging 2 Gauging point on Y-axis end face
Z-axis end face gauging 4 Gauging point on Z-axis end face
3 Execute a gauging cycle for the next gauging point.

The result of the gauging cycle is stored to A memory. Since the previous result of gauging has
already been saved in B memory, it is not overwritten by the new result of gauging.
4765-E P-120
2-8. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two Points

The center-point/distance (between points) calculation function calculates the center point and the
distance between two points, stored in A memory and B memory.
The distance is calculated in the X- and Y-axis components, individually.
The operating procedure for measuring two points (point 1 and point 2) and calculating the center
and the distance between them is described below.
Procedure :
1 Execute a gauging cycle at point 1.

The results obtained from measurement of point 1 are stored in A memory.
After the execution of the program, the data in A memory is saved in B memory.
3 Execute a gauging cycle at point 2.

The results obtained from measurement of point 2 are stored in A memory.
For the setting for argument PAXI, refer to [Table. 2-1 PAXI Setting].
When the program is executed, the center point and the distance between points 1 and 2 are
calculated and stored in A memory.
This completes the center-point/distance (between two points) calculating operation.
ME51326R0200400280001
4765-E P-121
[Supplement]
Axes do not move during the execution of the center-point/distance (between two points)
calculation function.
Example program
0
R10 G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z-5 H1
300 CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=3
Point 1 G0G56 Z10 H1
300
X300 Y-300
Center-point
between two Z-5
0
points R15 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=300
G0 Z500
M02
Point 2 H1: Touch probe tool length offset data
ME51326R0200400280002
4765-E P-122
2-9. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two End Faces
The center-point/distance (between end faces) calculation function calculates the center point and
the distance between two end faces (distance/center between inner faces, distance/center between
outer faces of a projection).
2-9-1. Touch Probe Movements during Gauging of the Distance between Two End
Faces
(1) Gauging the center-point/distance between inner faces
Skip feed
Rapid feed
ME51326R0200400300001
(2) Gauging the center-point/distance between outer faces of a projection
ME51326R0200400300002
4765-E P-123
2-9-2. Command Format of Center-point/Distance (between End Faces) Gauging

Program
(1) Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/distance between inner faces
CALL OO10 PMOD=** PEL1=**

(PELE=**) (PCE=**) (PGO=*) (PUDT=**) (POVT=**) (VNUM=**)
PELI : Anticipated distance between two end faces
PCE : Permissible center error
PGO= 1: Touch probe does not stop on occurrence of excessive error alarm.
0: Touch probe stops on occurrence of excessive error alarm.
PMOD= 11: X direction
12: Y direction
13: Z direction
PELE : Permissible distance error
PUDT : Undertravel distance (safety clearance to the sensor)
POVT : Overtravel distance (sensor damage prevention distance)
VNUN : Gauging cycle number
PMOD and PELl must always be designated.
ME51326R0200400310001
Variables in ( ) should be designated as needed.
(2) Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/distance between projection outer faces
CALL OO10 PMOD= ** PELI=** PIN=**

(PELE=**) (PCE=**) (PGO=*) (PUDT=**) (POVT=**) (VNUM=**)
PIN: Infeed direction feed distance
ME51326R0200400310002
Other variables: Same as in (1)

PMOD, PELI and PIN must always be designated.
Variables in ( ) should be designated as needed.
4765-E P-124
2-9-3. Gauging Result Display Screen
The results of center-point/distance (between end faces) gauging cycle are displayed on the GAUG-
ING RESULTS screen as shown below.
For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-3. Display-
ing the Result of Gauging].
ME51326R0200400320001
a: EXPECTED CENTER POSITION

This indicates the positioning point at the start of the gauging cycle. Coordinate value is displayed
only for the gauging axis.
b: PERMISSIBLE ERROR (value set for PCE).
A value is displayed only when PCE is set.
c: MEASURED CENTER POSITION
Coordinate value is displayed only for the gauging axis.
d: EXPECTED DISTANCE (value set for PELI)
A value is displayed only when PELI is set.
e: PERMISSIBLE ERROR (value for PELE)
A value is displayed only when PELE is set.
f: MEASURED DISTANCE
Distance (axis component) is displayed only for the gauging axis.
g: Result of evaluation
“DECISION OK” is displayed if the results of gauging are acceptable. In other cases, alarm contents
are displayed.
4765-E P-125
2-10. Automatic Zero Offset Function

The automatic zero offset function automatically offsets the zero point so that the point measured by
the dimension check function will take the desired coordinate values.
Zero offset is possible for a desired work coordinate system.
Procedure :
1 Execute a dimension check cycle for the point that should be established as the zero point.
It is possible to set the center point obtained as the result of center-point/distance calculation
function as the zero point.

CALL OO20 PHN=(Work coordinate system No. where zero offset is executed)
PX=(Coordinate value of X gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
PY=(Coordinate value of Y gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
PZ=(Coordinate value of Z gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
[Supplement]
1) Specify only the axis (PX, PY or PZ) for which zero offset is required.
2) Do not designate axes in which dimension check cycle has not been executed.
3) Zero offset is not executed unless PHN is designated.
An alarm (ALARM-B 2308) occurs.
After the execution of the program, the zero point of the work coordinate system specified by
PHN is offset so that the coordinate values of the measured point will take the value set for
PX, PY and/or PZ. The zero point is not offset for the unspecified axes.
The results can be checked by displaying the ZERO OFFSET screen.
The axes do not move even when the automatic zero offset is executed.
[Supplement]
1) Automatic zero offset is impossible if the CNC is reset after executing the dimension check
function. An alarm (ALARM-B 2310) occurs.
2) Execute the automatic zero offset function immediately after executing a gauging cycle (ID,
OD, end face) or a center-point/distance calculation cycle.
Example program (To set the ID center X=0, Y=0)
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z-5 H1
300 CALL OO20 PHN=1 PX=0 PY=0
G0 Z500
M02
ME51326R0200400330001
4765-E P-126
2-11. Copying the Touch Probe Offset Data

The touch probe offset data copying function is valid only for the MCM.
This function allows the touch probe length offset/radius compensation data, measured in the verti-
cal spindle, to be used as the touch probe offset data for the horizontal spindle. This function is suit-
able for operations that require simple operation rather than high accuracy
Procedure :
1 Measure the length offset data and radius compensation data of the touch probe by mounting it
in the vertical spindle.

CALL OO22
M02
After the execution of the program, touch probe offset data set for VSTOH[5] and VSTOD[1] to
[4] is set for VSTOH[1] to [4] and VSTOD[5] to [20], where the offset data is set for the individ-
ual directions (M73, M74, M75 and M76) of the MCM.
The result of setting can be confirmed by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO [N]) pop-
up window in the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
ME51326R0200400340001
[Supplement]
If touch probe offset data has already been set, the data is updated to the offset data
obtained using the touch probe mounted in the vertical spindle.
4765-E P-127
3. Automatic Gauging Function for B-/C-axis, 90° Angular

and Extension Attachments (Option)
This function executes automatic gauging of the vertical spindle attachment (also referred to as
attachment cover), 90° angular attachment, extension attachment, and B-/C-axis attachment
mounted in the spindle.
(PAC = 90°)
(PAC = 180°)
(PAC = 0°)
Z+ (PAC = 270°)
Y+
X+
ME51326R0200400350001
Fig.2-1 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of 90° Angular Attachment
PAC = 90°
PAC = 180°
PAC = 0°
PAC = 270°
PAB
Z+
Y+
X+
ME51326R0200400350002
Fig.2-2 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of B-/C-axis Attachment

4765-E P-128
[Supplement]
1) PAB index angle should be PAB = 0° or PAB = 90°.

2) The relationships between the items on the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPEN-
SATION screen and those on the ATTACHMENT SWlVEL COMPENSATION screen are indi-
cated below.
ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) ATTACHMENT SWlVE

SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen COMPENSATION screen
Data for PAC=0 PAB=0 H* in LOWER (G185) screen

ME51326R0200400350003
H*: Attachment compensation numbers H1 to H7

If two B-/C-axis attachments are used, set their data for the individual compensation numbers.
4765-E P-129
3-1. Automatic Gauging for 90° Angular Attachment and B-/C-axis

Attachment (PAB=90°)
The programs for executing the gauging functions are indicated below.
(1) Touch probe radius compensation

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI= PAT= PAC=
PDI: Datum hole diameter
(2) Touch probe length offset

CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI= PLI= PAT= PAC=
PEI: Z coordinate value of gauging face
PLI: Approximate length of touch probe
(3) ID gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI= PAT= PAC=
PDI: Anticipated diameter of target hole
(4) OD gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI= PIN= PAT= PAC=
PDI: Anticipated outer diameter
(5) End face gauging (X-axis)

CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI= PAT= PAC=
PEI: Anticipated X-end face position
(6) End face gauging (Y-axis)

PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position
(7) End face gauging (Z-axis)

PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position
(8) Additional variables

PAT: Attachment switch compensation No. (1 to 7)
PAC: Direction of 90° angular attachment, B-/C-axis attachment (0, 90, 180, 270)
[Supplement]
1) The gauging cycle is executed using the vertical spindle if PAT is not specified.
2) The value set for PAC is valid only when PAT is specified.
If PAC is not specified, “PAC=0” is assumed.
3) The PAC value must be set meeting the mounting angle of the 90° angular attachment or the
B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°).
4) There are no other changes in the automatic gauging function.
4765-E P-130
3-2. Automatic Gauging for Extension Attachment and B-/C-axis

Attachment (PAB=0°)
The programs for executing the gauging functions are indicated below.
(1) Touch probe radius compensation

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI= PAT= PAV=1
PDI: Datum hole diameter
(2) Touch probe length offset

CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI= PLI= PAT= PAV=1
PEI: Z coordinate value of gauging face
PLI: Approximate length of touch probe
(3) ID gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI= PAT= PAV=1
PDI: Anticipated diameter of target hole
(4) OD gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI= PIN= PAT= PAV=1
PDI: Anticipated outer diameter
(5) End face gauging (X-axis)

CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI= PAT= PAV=1
PEI: Anticipated X-end face position
(6) End face gauging (Y-axis)

PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position
(7) End face gauging (Z-axis)

PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position
(8) Additional variables

PAT: Attachment switch compensation No. (1 to 7)
PAV: Attachment type (1: Extension attachment / B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=0°), 0 or omis-
sion: 90° angular attachment / B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°))
[Supplement]
1) The gauging cycle is executed using the vertical spindle if PAT is not specified.
2) The value set for PAV is valid only when PAT is specified.
If PAV is not specified, “PAV = 0 (90° angular attachment/B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°))” is
assumed.
3) When a gauging cycle is executed using the extension attachment or B-/C-axis attachment
(PAB=0°), always set “PAV = 1”.
4) There are no other changes in the automatic gauging function.
4765-E P-131
4. Power ON/OFF Cycle of Renishaw’s Optical Touch Probe

(MP7/MP9/MP10)
The following describes the power ON/OFF cycle of Renishaw’s Optical Touch Probe.
4-1. Power ON/OFF Cycle Commands
4-1-1. Power ON Cycle Commands
The power ON cycle commands are indicated below.
(1) MP7
CALL OO16
(2) MP9
CALL OO16
(3) MP10
CALL OO18 (PRS= )
PRS:Specify the spindle index angle. If PRS is not specified, the spindle stops at the orienta-
tion position.
4-1-2. Power OFF Cycle Commands
The power OFF cycle commands are indicated below.
(1) MP7
CALL OO17
(2) MP9
Power is turned off in approximately 3 minutes after power ON.
(3) MP10
CALL OO19 (PRS= )
PRS:Specify the spindle index angle. If PRS is not specified, the spindle stops at the orienta-
tion position.
4765-E P-132
4-2. Power ON/OFF Cycle Operation
4-2-1. Power ON Cycle Operation

• OO16 (MP7/MP9)
Machine operation
a. At the present position, the spindle rotates at 500 min-1.

Note that nothing happens if the power is already ON.
b. The spindle stops and the function checks whether the power has been turned ON cor-
rectly.
If the power is found not to have been turned ON, operation is suspended (dwell com-
mand) for 7 seconds and then spindle start/stop is executed again.
If the power is not turned ON even after this, the following alarm message is displayed on
the screen and the machine stops.
2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 42
c. This completes the power ON cycle.
• OO18 (MP10)
Machine operation
a. The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code
(M127) is output internally.
Note that nothing happens if the power is already ON.
b. After a dwell for 5 seconds, the function checks whether the power has been turned ON
correctly.
If the power is found to have not been turned ON, operation is suspended (dwell com-
mand) for 5 seconds and then “M code output and a dwell for 5 seconds” is executed
again.
If the power is not turned ON even after this, the following alarm message is displayed on
c. This completes the power ON cycle.

4765-E P-133
4-2-2. Power OFF Cycle Operation

• OO17 (MP7)
Machine operation
a. At the present position, the spindle rotates at 500 min-1.

Note that nothing happens if the power is already OFF.
b. The spindle stops and the function checks whether the power has been turned OFF cor-
rectly.
If the power is found not to have been turned OFF, operation is suspended (dwell com-
mand) for 7 seconds and then spindle start/stop is executed again.
If the power is not turned OFF even after this, the following alarm message is displayed on
c. This completes the power OFF cycle.
• OO19 (MP10)
Machine operation
a. The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code
(M127) is output internally.
Note that nothing happens if the power is already OFF.
b. After a dwell for 5 seconds, the function checks whether the power has been turned OFF
correctly.
If the power is found not to have been turned OFF, operation is suspended (dwell com-
mand) for 5 seconds and then “M code output and a dwell for 5 seconds” is executed
again.
If the power is not turned OFF even after this, the following alarm message is displayed on
c. This completes the power OFF cycle.
[Supplement]
When subprogram OO16 or OO17 is executed, the spindle speed command (S command) value
is changed to “500” (min-1). Therefore, the required spindle speed must be specified to start the
spindle after the execution of OO16 or OO17.
4765-E P-134
5. Details
The foregoing subsections described the basic operating procedure for using the automatic gauging
functions.
This subsection gives detailed information on the automatic gauging functions.
5-1. Touch Probe Movements

Touch probe movements are described in detail below, taking gauging for an inner diameter as an
example.
(3)' (3)
(2)' (1)
(2) (1)'
(6)' (5)
(6) (5)' : Cutting feedrate

(4) (4)' : Rapid feedrate
ME51326R0200400440001
Touch probe movements in the ID gauging cycle consist of six passes (1) to (6), as shown in the
illustration above. Each of movements (1) to (6) may be regarded as a single gauging cycle on an
end face.
Therefore, touch probe movements are explained in detail for a single end face gauging cycle.
PUDT POVT
(1)
Position C
Position A (2)
Position B
(2)'
: Cutting feedrate
(3) : Rapid feedrate
(3)'
Anticipated end face position
ME51326R0200400440002
4765-E P-135
Machine operation
(1) The present position of the touch probe when subprogram OO10 is called is stored in the CNC
memory as position A.
(2) The position distanced from the anticipated position of the end face to be measured by the
amount set for PUDT is calculated.
This position is taken as position B. If PUDT is not set when subprogram OO10 is called, PUDT
is automatically set as 10 mm.
(3) If position A is already closer to the anticipated position of the end face to be measured than
position B, then movement 4) is skipped and movement 5) is executed.
(4) The touch probe advances at a rapid approach speed to position B.

If the actual position differs excessively from the anticipated position of the end face to be mea-
sured, the touch probe will come into contact with the end face to be measured during the rapid
approach movement. If this happens, the touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate
and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
If the touch probe stops during its advance due to signal reception error (for FM type touch
probe), it returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and then advances toward position B once
again.
If it stops again during this second advance due to signal reception error, it returns to position A
at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
(5) The function calculates the position beyond the anticipated position of the end face to be mea-
sured by the amount set for POVT. This position is taken as position C.
If POVT is not set when subprogram OO10 is called, “POVT = 10 mm” is assumed.
(6) The touch probe advances at a rapid approach speed to position C.

When it comes into contact with the end face to be measured during this advance, it stops at
that position.
If the actual position differs excessively from the anticipated position of the end face to be mea-
sured, the touch probe will fail to come into contact with the end face to be measured even after
it has reached position C. If this happens, the touch probe returns to position A at a rapid fee-
drate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
probe), it returns to position B at a rapid feedrate and then advances toward position C once
again.
(7) The touch probe returns at a rapid feedrate to a position 0.5 mm away from the contact
detected position.
(8) The touch probe advances at a slow approach speed to a position 1 mm beyond the contact
detected position on the end face.
If the touch probe comes into contact with the end face to be measured again while it is advanc-
ing, it comes to a stop immediately.
probe), it returns to the position 0.5 mm away from the contact detected position at a rapid fee-
drate. After that it advances toward the end face to be measured once again.
4765-E P-136
(9) The touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate.
[Supplement]
1) The position where the touch probe came into contact with the end face to be measured is the
position where the limit switch inside the touch probe was activated. Therefore, the actual
position of the ball of the touch probe is 0.1 to 0.2 mm beyond the position where it has come
into contact with the end face to be measured.
2) When the gauging cycle has been completed, the touch probe comes to a stop at the center of
the hole on which measurement was carried out in the case of ID / OD gauging cycles.
3) For POVT and PUDT, set a value larger than 3 mm.
4765-E P-137
5-2. Approach Speed to the Workpiece

The approach speed at which the touch probe moves toward a workpiece is described below.
Touch probe
(1)
(2) (3)
Workpiece
ME51326R0200400450001
(1) First approach speed

The first approach speed is the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves to the point
“safety clearance” away from the anticipated gauging point.
This feedrate is specified as PF1= when calling a subroutine.
The feed override function is valid for this feedrate.
• Approach speed to the workpiece when PF1 is specified

X/Y direction: PF1 value
Z direction: 1/2 PF1 value
• Approach speed to the workpiece when PF1 is not specified

X/Y direction: F4000
Z direction: F2000
(2) Second approach speed

The second approach speed represents the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves from
the first approach point to the point where it comes into contact with the workpiece.
This feedrate is specified as PF2= when calling a subroutine.
The feed override function is valid for this feedrate.
• Approach speed to the workpiece when PF2 is specified

X/Y/Z direction: PF2 value
• Approach speed to the workpiece when PF2 is not specified

X/Y/Z direction: F1000
4765-E P-138
(3) Third approach speed

The third approach speed is the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves from the point
0.5 mm away from the contact detected position to the position where the touch probe comes
into contact with the workpiece again.
The feedrate is fixed at F100 and the override function is not valid.
An example of OD gauging cycle (CALL O10 PMOD=6)
(1)
(8) (9)
G00
(16)
(7)
G31
(2) (6) (14) (15)
(10)
(5) (13)
(4) (12)
(3) (11)
ME51326R0200400450002
4765-E P-139
5-3. Variables Used in Subprograms

In this subsection, the variables necessary to make effective use of the automatic gauging functions
are described
5-3-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables
Variable
Subpro- Variables for which Numeri-
Variables for which Numeri- which
gram cal Value Should be Set as
cal Value Must be Set Must not
Name Needed
be Used
Datum Hole Zero OO21 None VNUM: Gauging cycle num- None
Point Setting ber
Touch Probe OO10 PMOD= 9 VNUM: Gauging cycle num- None
Radius Compen- PDI: Datum hole diameter ber
sation
Touch Probe OO10 PMOD= 8 VNUM: Gauging cycle num- None
Length Offset PEI: Z-coordinate value ber
of datum Z-end face
PLI: Approximate touch
probe length offset
data
Inner Diameter OO10 PMOD= 7 PDE: Permissible diameter None
Gauging PDI: Anticipated hole error
diameter PCE: Permissible hole
center position error
PGO:
=1 Does not cause
alarm stop on occur-
rence of excessive
error
PUDT: Undertravel distance
POVT: Overtravel distance
PMSR:
=1 Second gauging not
executed
VNUM: Gauging cycle num-
ber
PF1: 1st approach speed
PF2: 2nd approach speed
4765-E P-140
Variable
Name Needed
be Used
Outer Diameter OO10 PMOD= 6 PDE: Permissible diameter None
Gauging PDI: Anticipated boss error
diameter PCE: Permissible center
PIN: Infeed direction feed position error
distance (PZIN) PGO:
=1 Does not cause
rence of excessive
error
PMSR:
=1 Second gauging not
executed
ber
End face gauging OO10 PMOD= 1 PEE: Permissible error of None
(X-axis) PEI: Anticipated X-end X-end face position
face position PGO:
=1 Does not cause
rence excessive
error
ber
(Y-axis) PEI: Anticipated Y-end Y-end face position
face position PGO:
=1 Does not cause
rence of excessive
error
ber
4765-E P-141
Variable
Name Needed
be Used
(Z-axis) PEI: Anticipated Z-end Z-end face position
face position PGO:
=1 Does not cause
rence of excessive
error
ber
Gauging cycle for OO10 PMOD: PELI: Anticipated distance
calculating the =11 X direction between two end
center-point/ dis- =12 Y direction faces
tance between =13 Z direction PCE: Permissible center
inner faces error
PGO:
=1 Does not cause
rence of excessive
error.
=0 Causes alarm stop
on occurrence of
excessive error.
PELE: Permissible dis-
tance error
PUDT: Undertravel dis-
tance (safety clear-
ance to the sensor)
(sensor damage pre-
vention distance)
ber
PMOD and PELI must always
be specified.
4765-E P-142
Variable
Name Needed
be Used
Gauging cycle for OO10 PMOD: PELI: Anticipated distance
calculating the =11 X direction between two end
center-point/ dis- =12 Y direction faces
tance between =13 Z direction PCE: Permissible center
outer faces error
PGO: Does not cause
=1 alarm stop on occur-
rence of excessive
error.
=0 Causes alarm stop
on occurrence of
excessive error.
PELE: Permissible dis-
tance error
PUDT: Undertravel dis-
tance (safety clear-
ance to the sensor)
(sensor damage pre-
vention distance)
PIN: Infeed direction feed
distance
ber
PMOD, PELI and PIN must
always be specified.
Saving the gaug- OO10 PMOD= 15 None
ing result data PAXI:
=1 Saving the X-axis
data
=2 Saving the Y-axis
data
=3 Saving the X-/Y-axis
data
=4 Saving the Z-axis
data
=5 Saving the X-/Z-axis
data
=6 Saving the Y-/Z-axis
data
=7 Saving the X-/Y-/Z-
axis data
4765-E P-143
Variable
Name Needed
be Used
Gauging cycle for OO10 PMOD= 14 PE: Permissible error None
calculating the PAXI: PXCI: Anticipated center
center-point/ dis- =1 Calculation on the position - X
tance between X-axis PXCE: Permissible center
two points =2 Calculation on the position error - X
Y-axis PXLI: Anticipated dis-
=3 Calculation on the tance - X-X
X-/Y-axis PXLE: Permissible dis-
=4 Calculation on the tance error - X-X
Z-axis PYCI: Anticipated center
=5 Calculation on the position - Y
X-/Z-axis PYCE: Permissible center
=6 Calculation on the position error - Y
Y-/Z-axis PYLI: Anticipated distance
=7 Calculation on the - Y-Y
X-/Y-/Z-axis PYLE: Permissible dis-
tance error - Y-Y
PZCI: Anticipated center
position - Z
PZCE: Permissible center
position error - Z
PZLI: Anticipated distance
- Z-Z
PZLE: Permissible dis-
tance error - Z-Z
PGO:
=1 Does not cause
rence of excessive
error.
Automatic zero OO20 PHN: Coordinate system None
offset number for which
zero point is offset
PX: X coordinate value
after zero offset
PY: Y coordinate value
after zero offset
PZ: Z coordinate value
after zero offset
4765-E P-144
5-3-2. Description of Variables

(1) PMOD (P MODE)
Designates the automatic gauging mode.
PMOD Setting Gauging Mode
1 End face gauging cycle (X-axis)
2 End face gauging cycle (Y-axis)
3 End face gauging cycle (Z-axis)
6 OD gauging cycle
7 ID gauging cycle
8 Touch probe length offset
9 Touch probe radius compensation
Calculation of center and distance
14
between two points
15 Saving of the measurement results
(2) PDI (P DIAMETER IDEAL VALUE)

Sets the anticipated diameter in the ID/OD gauging cycles.
(3) PDE (P DIAMETER ERROR LIMIT)

Sets the permissible error of the diameter for the ID/OD gauging cycles as an absolute value.
The hole dia. error over alarm occurs if:
PDE < | PDl - (Actual measured value of the diameter) |
The value obtained from the measurement in the X-axis direction is used as the actual mea-
sured value.
With the horizontal spindle of the MCM, the value measured in either the X- or Y- axis direction
is used as the actual measured value.
The measured diameter is not evaluated if PDE is not set. In this case, the result of judgment is
always OK.
(4) PCE (P CENTER ERROR LIMIT)

Sets the permissible error of the center position of a circle as an absolute value for ID/OD gaug-
ing cycles.
The X-axis permissible error, the Y-axis permissible error and Z-axis permissible error cannot
be set individually.
The excessive off-center alarm occurs when,
PCE < | (Anticipated center of X-axis) - (Actual measured center of X-axis) |
PCE < | (Anticipated center of Y-axis) - (Actual measured center of Y-axis) |
PCE < | (anticipated center of Z-axis) - (actual measured center of Z-axis) | (for MCM horizontal
spindle)
The anticipated centers of the X-, Y- and Z-axis are the actual positions of the X-, Y- and Z-axis
when the ID/OD gauging subprograms are called during the execution of a part program.
Error in the measured center position is not evaluated if PCE is not set.
(5) PIN (P IN)/PZIN (P Z IN)

Sets the Z-axis direction infeed distance as a relative value (positive incremental amount) for
the OD gauging cycle
(6) PEI (P EDGE IDEAL VALUE)

Sets the end face position of the gauging target for the X-, Y- and Z-axis end face gauging
cycles and the touch probe length offset cycle.
4765-E P-145
(7) PEE (P EDGE ERROR LIMIT)

Sets the permissible error of the end face position for an end face gauging cycle.
The excessive off-center alarm occurs when,
PEE< | PEI - (Actual measured value of end face) |
Error in the measured end face position is not evaluated if PEE is not set.
(8) PUDT (P UNDER TRAVEL)

Sets the undertravel distance as an absolute value.
During the execution of a gauging cycle, the touch probe moves to a position a certain amount
away from the anticipated contact detection position at a fast feedrate. This amount is set using
PUDT.
If no value is set for PUDT, the undertravel distance is automatically set at 10 mm.
The gauging impossible alarm occurs when the touch probe comes into contact with the work-
piece while it is advancing at a fast feedrate up to this position. If an occurrence of this error is
suspected, PUDT should be set. Usually, set a value larger than 3 mm.
For the designation of PUDT, see examples 1 to 4.
(9) POVT (P OVER TRAVEL)

Sets the overtravel distance as absolute values.
During the execution of a gauging cycle, the touch probe moves to a position PUDT away from
the anticipated contact detection position at a fast feedrate. After this positioning, the touch
probe moves to a position a certain amount beyond the anticipated contact detection position at
a medium-fast feedrate. This amount is set using POVT.
If no value is set for POVT, the overtravel distance is automatically set at 10 mm.
The gauging impossible alarm occurs when the touch probe fails to contact the workpiece even
on reaching the position determined by POVT. If an occurrence of this error is suspected,
POVT should be set.
For the designation of POVT, see examples 1 to 4.
CAUTION
Since the touch probe stops when it comes into contact with the workpiece, setting a large value
for POVT will generally not cause a problem. However, it could cause the touch probe unit to
strike the workpiece if a contact signal is not output due to the failure of the touch probe itself.
When an axis movement command larger than the touch probe stylus stroke is set, the touch
probe will be damaged if the contact signal is not output due to the failure of the touch probe itself.
Therefore, do not set an unnecessarily large value for POVT.
Example 1: PUDT and POVT not designated

If PUDT and POVT are not designated, 10 mm is automatically set as the under-
travel and overtravel distance.
Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40
Anticipated Actual
position position
X30 X40 X43 X50
Touch probe stops if contact

signal is not output.
PUDT=10 POVT=10
ME51326R0200400480001
4765-E P-146
Example 2: Only POVT designated

Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 POVT=2
X30 X35 X40 X42

PUDT=10 POVT=2
Set so that this distance is smaller than the
7mm allowable over-stroke of the touch probe.
ME51326R0200400480002
Example 3 Only PUDT designated (PUDT = 15)

Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 PUDT=15
X25 X30 X40 X50

PUDT=15 POVT=10
ME51326R0200400480003
[Supplement]
Determine the PUDT value taking into consideration the allowable over-stroke of the touch probe.
Example 4: Both POVT and PUDT designated (POVT = 5, PUDT = 15)

Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 POVT=5
X25 X35 X40 X45

PUDT=15 POVT=5
ME51326R0200400480004
4765-E P-147
(10) PMSR (P MEASURE)

Usually, contact detection is executed two times in the X-axis direction when an ID/OD gauging
cycle is executed. If “PMSR = 1” is set, however, the second contact detection cycle is not exe-
cuted.
When the touch probe is set in the horizontal spindle of MCM, the second contact detection
cycle in the X or Y-axis direction is not executed.
(11) PGO (P GO)
• When “PGO = 1” is set, an alarm does not occur if the results obtained from the gauging
cycle exceed the permissible range. When “PGO = 1” is set, judge the results of gauging
(OK/NG) in a part program by reading system variable VOK1 after the completion of an
automatic gauging subprogram.
“VOK1 = 0” when the result is OK.
• Another system variable, VOK2, is also used for storing the result of the gauging cycle.
Differing from system variable VOK1, which holds the result of the dimension check cycle
executed immediately before its designation, VOK2 indicates, if “VOK2 ≠ 0”, an occurrence
that the result of any one of dimension check cycles has exceeded the permissible error in
all of the dimension check cycles executed after VOK2 has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0).
• In the case of the gauging impossible alarm, zero offset impossible alarm, command miss-
ing error alarm or no subprogram function alarm, the CNC is alarm-stopped even if “PGO =
1” is set.
When PGO is not set, the CNC is alarm-stopped when the gauging cycle results have
exceeded the permissible error also.
Program example with "PGO = 1" setting

.
.
N24 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=80 PDE=0.05 PGO=1.......... ID gauging
N25 IF [VOK1 EQ 0] N29 ........................................................ Jumps to N29 if the result is OK.
N26 IF [VC930 GT 80000] N100.............................................. Jumps to N100 if the diameter is
greater than φ80.05 mm.
N27 M0
N28 GOTO N18 ....................................................................... Re-machining
N29 M6
N30 T10
N31 G0 X140 Y0
.
.
ME51326R0200400480005
With the program above, the diameter of the hole finished by boring operation is measured
(N24). If the hole diameter is within a specified range (φ79.95 to φ80.05 mm), the machin-
ing cycle is continued. If the diameter is larger than φ80.05 mm, the workpiece is deter-
mined defective and the machining cycle is halted.
If the diameter is smaller than φ79.95 mm, execution of the program is interrupted by the
M0 command in N27. This allows the operator to adjust the boring bit, to carry out the bor-
ing cycle on the same hole again.
(12) VNUM (V NUM BER)

Sets the gauging cycle number (range: 0 to 9999).
Before the execution of an ID/OD gauging cycle, touch probe length offset, or touch probe
radius compensation cycle, the present VNUM value is increased by “1” and the new number is
printed as the gauging cycle number
Once designated, VNUM is automatically increased by “1” at each execution of a gauging cycle
to be printed.
4765-E P-148
(13) PAXI (P AXIS)

Sets the target axes for saving the gauging cycle results or for calculating the center and dis-
tance between two points.
PAXI Setting Target Axes
1 X-axis
2 Y-axis
3 X- and Y-axis
4 Z-axis
5 X- and Z-axis
6 Y- and Z-axis
7 X-, Y- and Z-axis
(14) PHN (P H NUMBER)

Sets the work coordinate system number for which zero offset is executed using the automatic
zero offset function.
When PHN is not set, this results in a command missing alarm.
(15) PX, PY, PZ

These variables set the coordinate values that the actual position should take after offsetting of
the zero point by the automatic zero offset function.
Set the coordinate value only for the axes on which zero offset is required.
For the undesignated axes, the zero offset data remains unchanged.
(16)
Example: The procedure for offsetting the zero point of work coordinate system No. 2 so
that the center of an inner diameter will have the coordinate values X = 10, Y = 50
is described below.
a. Execute the ID gauging cycle.
b. Execute the following program.

CALL OO20 PHN=2 PX=10 PY=50
(17) PXCI (P X CENTER IDEAL VALUE)/PYCI (P Y CENTER IDEAL VALUE)

/PZCI (P Z CENTER IDEAL VALUE)
These variables set the anticipated values of the center between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in
the calculation of the center/distance between two points.
When these values are not set, the center position obtained as the result of a gauging cycle
result is not evaluated.
(18) PXCE (P X CENTER ERROR LIMIT)/PYCE (P Y CENTER ERROR LIMIT)

/PZCE (P Z CENTER ERROR LIMIT)
These variables set the permissible errors in the position of the center between two points (X-X,
Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calculation of the center/distance between two points. Designate absolute val-
ues.
When these values are not set, the center position obtained as the result of a gauging cycle is
not evaluated.
(19) PXLI (P X LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)/PYLI (P Y LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)

/PZLI (P Z LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)
These variables set the anticipated distances between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calcula-
tion of the center/distance between two points.
When these values are not set, the distance between two points obtained as the results of a
gauging cycle result is not evaluated.
4765-E P-149
(20) PXLE (P X LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)/PYLE (P Y LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)

/PZLE (P Z LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)
These variables set the permissible errors in the distances between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in
the calculation of the center/distance between two points. Designate absolute values.
When these values are not set, the distance between two points obtained as the results of a
gauging cycle result is not evaluated.
(21) PE (P ERROR)
For the designation of the cycle to calculate the center/distance between two points, if the same
value is assigned to permissible error values of the center position and the distance, variable
PE can replace the designation of PXCE, PYCE, PZCE, PXLE, PYLE and PZLE.
The following two programs have the same effect.
PXCE=0.01 PYCE=0.01 PZCE=0.01 PXLE=0.01 PYLE=0.01 PZLE=0.01
PE=0.01
Note that PE is given priority over PXCE, PYCE, PZCE, PXLE, PYLE and PZLE. Therefore,
take care when using PE with other variables.
If the setting is, for example, as indicated below
PE=0.01 PZCE=0.02 PZLE=0.03
it is the same as
PE=0.01 PZCE=0.01 PZLE=0.01
(22) PELI (P EDGE LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)

Sets the anticipated distance between two faces.
(23) PELE (P EDGE LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)

Sets the permissible error between the distance set for PELI and the actual measured value.
4765-E P-150
5-3-3. Common Variables for Storing Gauging Cycle Results
After the execution of an automatic gauging cycle, the obtained results can be checked by display-
ing the GAUGING RESULTS screen. In addition to this check, the results can be used in a part pro-
gram to control program flow and other processing since they are stored in the common variables
indicated below.
Type of
Common Common Common
Type of Gauging Cycle Type of Gauging Cycle Gauging
Variable Variable Variable
Cycle
End face
ID gauging: Center (X) VS29 Data saving: X-axis data VS26 gauging: X- VS29
axis data
End face
ID gauging: Center (Y) VS28 Data saving: Y-axis data VS25 gauging: Y- VS28
axis data
End face
ID gauging: ID VS30 Data saving: Z-axis data VS24 gauging: Z- VS27
axis data
Center between two
OD gauging: Center (X) VS29 VS29
points (X)
Center between two

OD gauging: Center (Y) VS28 VS28 — —
points (Y)
Center between two

OD gauging: OD VS30 VS27
points (Z)
Note that referencing of the common variables indicated above is not allowed in the usual common
variable reference method. To use the data stored in these common variables, move it to other
common variables that can be referenced.
To reference the end face gauging result in the X-axis direction, move the data to VC1, for example,
by specifying “VC1 = VS29”, then read common variable VC1 in a part program.
[Supplement]
When the CNC is reset or the operation mode is changed to manual after the execution of a
gauging cycle, the data obtained in this gauging cycle is cleared. In this case, it is necessary to
execute the gauging cycle again.
4765-E P-151
6. Touch Probe Safety Measures
6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation

The touch probe signal is transmitted by the proximity switch. However, when chips adhere to the
proximity switch, the touch probe signal may not be transmitted.
To check if the proximity switch is operating correctly, the following sequence is executed when an
automatic gauging cycle is executed.
Machine operation
(1) The touch probe signal is checked when an automatic gauging cycle subprogram OO10 is
called.
(2) If the signal is not output, the Z-axis moves to the travel end in the positive (+) direction and the
spindle starts rotating to remove chips.
(3) If the output of the signal is not confirmed even after the check above is repeated several times,
the operation is stopped by the gauging impossible alarm.
If the output of the signal is confirmed, the axes move to the gauging cycle start point at a rapid
feedrate.
[Supplement]
1) When the touch probe is set in the spindle manually, carry out this operation to confirm that the
signal is transmitted even if the proximity switch seems to be functioning correctly.
2) When the touch probe is set in the spindle manually, always orient the spindle before calling
an automatic gauging cycle subprogram.
3) With the FM type touch probe, operations of the proximity switch are not checked.
6-2. Replacing the Touch Probe Battery

The FM type touch probe has a battery incorporated in its body.
If a gauging cycle is executed while the battery voltage is low, the touch probe fails to function nor-
mally and the gauging cycle impossible alarm occurs.
6-2-1. Checking the Battery
Press the battery ON switch halfway with the touch probe detached from the spindle.
The low battery voltage indicating LED should light in this condition.
If it is not lit, replace the battery.
If the low battery voltage indicating LED is blinking while the touch probe is set in the spindle,
replace the battery soon.
4765-E P-152
6-2-2. Replacing the Battery
To replace the battery, follow the procedure indicated below. Take care not to bend the antenna and
battery holder while replacing the battery.
Battery and holder

Cover
Battery ON switch Cover clamp nut
Stylus
Transmission antenna Low battery voltage

indicating LED
There are two types of battery ON switch.
ME51326R0200400530001
Procedure :
1 Remove the cover clamp nut and the cover.

The battery incorporated in the touch probe body will be exposed.
2 Remove the battery from the battery holder.
3 Disconnect the battery connector and replace the battery with a new one.
[Supplement]
1) Battery type: Type OO6P (9 V, 2 pcs.)

2) Battery life: Approx. 40 hours in continuous use
3) You are recommended to remove the battery from the touch probe unit and store it properly
when the touch probe is not used.
4765-E P-153
7. Supplementary Information
Supplementary information relating to the automatic gauging function is given below. Before using
this function, make sure you fully understand the information below.
(1) All commands for programs are given in units of 1 mm or 0.001 mm. Commands should be
given in the unit presently selected.
Commands cannot be given in units of 0.01 mm.
(2) Cutter radius compensation mode cancel command (G40) is executed in an automatic gauging
cycle subprogram.
Note that S commands may be changed due to the execution of an automatic gauging cycle
subprogram.
(3) Do not call an automatic gauging cycle subprogram while a shift amount in a manual interven-
tion operation remains.
If an automatic gauging cycle subprogram is called in this state, the gauging impossible alarm
occurs.
(4) The work coordinate system cannot be changed during the execution of an automatic gauging
cycle subprogram.
(5) The user area for tape storage length, number of work coordinate sets, number of tool offset
sets, and common variables is not used in execution of an automatic gauging cycle subpro-
gram.
(6) Do not execute an automatic gauging/automatic zero offset cycle while using a local coordinate
system or the graphics enlarge/reduction mode.
(7) The permissible nesting level of subroutines during the execution of an automatic gauging sub-
program is two.
Accordingly, nesting of the maximum of six levels is possible only when the automatic gauging
function is called.
(8) Do not call an automatic gauging subprogram in the machine coordinate system (H0).
(9) As with other tools, you are recommended to set the same number as the touch probe tool
number for VSTOH[5] as the tool offset number. This facilitates program and other checking
since the touch probe length offset data can be checked in the same way as for other tools.
(10) When setting a value for POVT, the restrictions indicated below apply. When a 100% feed over-
ride is set, the feedrate is F1000.
Example
1st Approach Speed (Feed Override Setting) Min. POVT Setting
F1000 (100%) 2 mm
F1500 (150%) 3 mm
F2000 (200%) 4 mm
[Supplement]
The minimum value of POVT varies within a range of 2 to 5 mm depending on the servo charac-
teristics.
4765-E P-154
(11) The diameter of holes or bosses to be measured must be larger than φ20 mm.
(12) With MCM series machining centers, index the swivel head to the rear position (M75) when set-
ting the touch probe in the vertical spindle.
If the touch probe is set in the vertical spindle with the swivel head at a position other than the
rear position, an alarm occurs (UNTENDED: gauging impossible 3C).
Note that the automatic or MDI mode must be selected when mounting the touch probe in the
vertical spindle.
(13) With MCM series machining centers, never execute the zero point setting cycle (OO21) for the
datum hole with the horizontal spindle.
(14) The direction of touch probe mounting in the spindle is determined by the machine model.
Therefore, pay attention to the direction when manually mounting the touch probe in the spin-
dle.
(15) To check the touch probe function, follow the steps indicated below.
a. After entering “VNCOM[1] = 8” in the MDI mode, press the CYCLE START button.
b. Manually move the touch probe right and left.
c. The characters “touch probe” on the screen (position display screen) are highlighted if the
touch probe is operating correctly.
The data at VNCOM[1] is reset to “0” when the CNC is reset or the operation mode is
changed to manual.
In this state, the displayed characters do not change even when the touch probe is moved.
CAUTION
If the touch probe is manually set in the horizontal spindle of an MCM series machining center to
execute the touch probe radius compensation cycle, always set the horizontal spindle tool com-
mand on the TOOL DATA SET screen.
Otherwise, the Z-axis will move and the touch probe will be broken.
4765-E P-155
8. Program Examples
Examples of programs for using the automatic gauging function are described below.
These examples may be used for reference when making your own programs.
8-1. ID Gauging
.
.
N36 T1......................................................................................... (T1: Touch probe)
N37 M6
N38 T17
N39 G0 X250 Y190.....................................................................Positioning at approximate center of
the hole to be measured
N40 G56 Z-10 H1....................................................................... Inserting the touch probe ball int the
hole
(H1: Tool offset number of the touch
probe)
N41 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=50 (PDE=0.1 PCE=0.05)........ (PDI: Anticipated ID)
(PDE: Permissible ID error)
(PCE: Permissible center position
error)
.
.
Executes the ID gauging cycle
.
.
N42 G0 Z300.............................................................................. After the completion of the gauging
cycle, the touch probe ball remains
in the hole. Move the touch probe in
the Z+ direction.
.
.
ME51326R0200400560001
(X,Y)=250.190 Touch probe
PDI=50
ME51326R0200400560002
Variables PDE and PCE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, the errors are not evaluated.
4765-E P-156
8-2. OD Gauging
.
.
N62 T1......................................................................... (T1: Touch probe)
N63 M6
N64 T12
N65 G0 X310 Y210 ..................................................... Positioning at approximate center of the
boss (OD) to be measured
N66 G56 Z40 H1.......................................................... Positioning of Z-axis at a point 10 to
several tens of mm above the gauging
point (see the illustration below.)
N67 CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=50 PZIN=30
(PDE=0.1 PCE=0.05)............ Executing the OD gauging cycle
(PDI: Anticipated OD)
(PZIN: Z-direction infeed amount)
(PDE: Permissible OD error)
(PCE: Permissible center position error)
.
.
ME51326R0200400570001
Positioning point before

start of gauging cycle
Positioning of Z-axis at
the gauging level
Workpiece to
be measured
Touch probe
PZIN = 30 mm
PDI = 50 mm For PZIN, set the distance (Z-axis) from the positioning
point level to the gauging level.
ME51326R0200400570002
Variables PDE and PCE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, the errors are not evaluated.
After the completion of the gauging cycle, the touch probe stops at the center of the measured OD
(Z-axis retracts to the positioning point).
4765-E P-157
8-3. End Face Gauging on Z-axis
.
.
N95 T1.............................................................................. (T1: Touch probe)
N96 M6
N97 T4
N98 G0 X-25 Y60 Positioning at a point 10 to several tens mm away from the Z-end
N99 G56 Z80 H1 face to be measured
N100 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=35 (PEE=0.1).............. (PEI: Anticipated end face position)
(PEE: Permissible error)
N101 G0 Z300
.
.
ME51326R0200400580001
Position the touch probe ball at

a point 10 to several tens of mm
away from the target end face.
After the completion of the gauging

cycle, the touch probe returns to the
point where the first positioning was
completed.
PEI =
35 mm
ME51326R0200400580002
Variable PEE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If this variable is not specified, however, the error is not evaluated.
4765-E P-158
8-4. Distance between End Faces (X-axis direction)
.
.
N242 G0 X-20 Y60 Positioning at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from one
N243 G56 Z-10 H1 of the target end faces (end face A)
N244 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=0 ........................... End face gauging cycle on end face A
N245 CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=1......................... Storing the result of gauging in B
memory
N246 G0 Z300
N247 X90 Positioning at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from the other
N248 G56 Z-10 H1 target end face (end face B)
N249 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=70 .......................... End face gauging cycle on end face B
N250 CALL OO10 PMOD=14 PAXI=1
(PXCI=35 PXCE=0.05 PXLI=70 PXLE=0.05)............ Distance calculation cycle
(PXCI: Anticipated center position)
(PXCE: Permissible center position
error)
(PXLI: Anticipated distance between
end faces)
(PXLE: Permissible error of distance
between end faces)
N251 G0 Z300
.
.
N250 CALL OO10 PMOD=14...................................... No axis moves during the execution of
the distance calculationcycle
ME51326R0200400590001
End face A End face B
PXCI = 35
10 to Several 10 to Several
tens of mm PXCI = 70 tens of mm
Program zero
ME51326R0200400590002
Variables specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, errors are not evaluated.
When measuring the center and the distance between two points, the commands to store the first
gauging data in B memory are necessary (Example: N245 CALL OO10 PMOD=15).
4765-E P-159
If these commands are not specified, the result of the first gauging cycle is overwritten by the result
of the next gauging cycle.
For details on how to save the gauging result data refer to [2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results].
8-5. Automatic Zero Offset
.
.
N412 G0 X40 Y50
N413 G56 Z-40 H1
N414 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=45 (PCE=0.03 PDE=0.05).. ID gauging cycle
N415 CALL OO20 PHN=5 PX=0 PY=0.................................... For coordinate system No. 5, the
zero point (X = 0, Y = 0) is
established at the hole center
obtained by executing the ID
gauging cycle.
(PHN: Coordinate system No.)
N416 G0 Z300
N417 X60 Y60
N418 G56 Z-20 H1
N419 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=-30 (PEE=0.05)...................End face gauging cycle on Z- axis
N420 CALL OO20 PHN=5 PZ=0.............................................. For the coordinate system No. 5,
the zero point (Z = 0) is
established at the end face
position obtained bexecuting the
end face gauging cycle
(Z-axis).N421 G0 Z300
ME51326R0200400600001
The zero point of coordinate system

No. 5 is set at the hole center and the
end face (face A).
Face A
30
Program zero
ME51326R0200400600002
On execution of sequences N415 and N420, no axis moves.

Execute the automatic zero offset cycle immediately after the execution of a gauging cycle (ID/OD
gauging cycle, end face gauging cycle, center/distance between two points calculation cycle).
Since an alarm occurs and zero offset is not executed if PHN is not set, always set it.
4765-E P-160
8-6. Example Program for MCM Horizontal Spindle
φ100 4-M20
2-10
DRILL
φ75 4-M6
Z X
Y
ME51326R0200400610001
4765-E P-161
.
.
N1 G15 H1......................................................... Selecting work coordinate system No. 1
N2 G0 X-500 Y800 G56 H1
N3 T1................................................................. T1: Touch probe
N4 M6
N5 T10 .............................................................. T10: φ17.5 drill
N6 G0 X0 Y0...................................................... Moving the X- and Y-axis to the anticipated
center of the φ100 mm hole
N7 Z-5 H1.......................................................... Moving the touch probe ball into the hole
(H1: Touch probe length offset data)
N8 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=100 POVT=3.... ID gauging cycle at φ100 mm hole
(PDI: Anticipated hole diameter)
(POVT: Overtravel distance)
N9 CALL OO20 PX=0 PY=0 PHN=1................. Zero offset according to the gauging results
(PX: X coordinate value after zero offset)
(PY: Y coordinate value after zero offset)
(PHN: Coordinate system No.)
N10 G0 Z100
N11 X75
N12 G56 Z30 H1............................................... Positioning of the Z-axis near the end face
(Z-axis)
N13 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=0 POVT=3 End face gauging cycle (Z-axis)
(PEI: Anticipated end face position)
N14 CALL OO20 PZ=0 PHN=1......................... Zero offset according to the gauging results
(PZ: Z coordinate value after zero offset)
N15 G0 Z400
N16 X500 Y800
N17 M6
N18 T11............................................................. T11: M20 tap
N19 NCYL G81 G56 R5 Z-58 F90 S450 H10.... Part program for machining at the workpiece
upper face
ME51326R0200400610002
4765-E P-162
.
.
N49 G0 Z400
N50 X500 Y800
N51 M67
N52 M77
N53 T15
N54 G0 Y0 M75 ................................................ M75: Indexing the swivel head to the rear
position
N55 G54 X-500 H1
N56 Z-170 ........................................................ Moving the Y- and Z-axis to the anticipated
center of the φ75 mm hole
N57 X-270 ........................................................ Moving the touch probe ball into the hole
N58 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=75.................. ID gauging cycle at φ75 mm hole
N59 CALL OO20 PY=0 PZ=0 PHN=2 .............. Zero offset according to the gauging results
N60 G0 X-400
N61 Y60
N62 G54 X-300 H1............................................ Positioning of the X-axis near the end face
(X-axis)
N63 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=-280 .............. End face gauging cycle (X-axis)
N64 CALL OO20 PX=0 PHN=2 ....................... Zero offset according to the gauging results
N65 G0 X-400
.
.
Normal part program
.
.
ME51326R0200400610003
4765-E P-163
9. Alarm List
9-1. Alarm List

UNTENDED: At the end of the gauging impossible Refer to the Gauging Impossible
gauging message, the cause code is dis- Cause Code Chart and eliminate the
impossible played. cause.
(ALARM-B 2305)
"ALARM-B 230
UNTENDED:
gauging impossible ××"
↑
Cause code
UNTENDED: Although there is no automatic zero —

no subprogram offset specification, an attempt was
function made to call the automatic zero offset
(ALARM-B 2311) subprogram.
UNTENDED: An undefined number was set for Check the value set at PMOD.
command variable PMOD.
missing There is no PDI setting for ID/OD For the ID/OD gauging cycle, set an
(ALARM-B 2308) gauging cycle, or for touch probe anticipated diameter for PDI. For the
radius compensation cycle. touch probe radius compensation
cycle, set an accurate ID for PDI.
There is no PHN setting in automatic Set the work coordinate system num-
zero offset commands. ber for which zero offset is to be exe-
cuted for PHN.
There is no PEI setting for the end For the end face gauging cycle, set
face gauging cycle (X, Y or Z), or for an anticipated end face position for
the touch probe length offset cycle. PEl. For the touch probe tool length
offset cycle, set accurate Z end face
position data for PEI.
UNTENDED: The difference between the antici- —
hole dia. pated diameter and the actual diame-
error over ter obtained as the result of ID/OD
(ALARM-B 2306) gauging cycle has exceeded the per-
missible error (PDE).
off centerline pated center position and the actual
(ALARM-B 2307) center position obtained as the result
of the ID/OD gauging cycle has
exceeded the permissible error
(PCE).
The difference between the antici- —
pated end face position and the
actual end face position obtained as
the result of the end face gauging
cycle (X, Y, Z) has exceeded the per-
missible error (PEE).
4765-E P-164

center distance pated value (center position and dis-
error over tance between two points) and the
(ALARM-B 2312) actual value obtained as the results
of the gauging and calculation cycle
has exceeded the permissible error.
UNTENDED: Since the results of the dimension —
zero offset check executed immediately before
impossible the automatic zero offset function
(ALARM-B 2310) were NG, zero offsetting is impossi-
ble.
Automatic zero offset is executed Automatic zero offset is possible only
although a dimension check is not after a dimension check has been
executed. executed.
Automatic zero offset is executed If the RESET button is pressed after
after pressing the RESET button fol- executing the dimension check, the
lowing the execution of a dimension results of the gauging cycle are
check. cleared and thus the automatic zero
offset is impossible. In this case, the
dimension check must be executed
again.
Touch probe The battery incorporated in the Replace the battery.
battery Kuroda touch probe has expired. The
(ALARM-D 4223) life expiration signal is turned on.
<I/O bit>
I/O check No. 22 Bit 7 (MX-V series)
ON (green): Abnormal
OFF: Normal
The input bit position varies accord-
ing to the machine model. For the bit
position, refer to the wiring diagram.
4765-E P-165
9-2. Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
1 A maker subprogram is called while Call a maker subprogram after select- OO10
the machine coordinate system (H0) is ing a work coordinate system (G15 H1, OO30
selected for example).
2 The mirror image function is active. Cancel the mirror image function first. OO10
OO30
3 Manual shift amount (total) remains. Cancel the manual shift amount (total) OO10
to zero. OO30
4 In the G11 mode (parallel or rotation Cancel the G11 mode first. OO10
shift of a coordinate)
5 In the G51 mode Cancel the G51 mode first. OO10
(graphics enlargement/reduction)
6 T number is zero (0), or no tool is set. • Specify a T number. OO30
• Specify the PTLN command.
7 Specified T number or PTLN com- Specify a T number or PTLN command OO30
mand is larger than the maximum off- within the allowable range.
set number.
8 The power to the probe is not on when Check the following: OO15
the flash on cycle is attempted.
• Is there any obstacle between the
receiver head and the probe?
• Is the spindle index angle for the
probe correct?
• Does the receiver head flash?
9 The offset amount of the positioning When positioning the Y and Z axes, OO30
point for cycle start from the touch sen- position them within the range of
sor zero point is greater than PCHK PCHK from the touch sensor zero
(only for Y and Z axes). point.
A The touch probe microcomputer stays Check whether chips are accumulating OO10
on. on the proximity switch.
B The result of the touch probe test is Check the touch probe battery. OO10
NG.
The touch probe signal cannot be con-
firmed.
C The touch probe contacts the work- With the FM type touch probe, recep- OO10
piece while it is being fed at a rapid tion of signals is not correct.
approach feedrate (X-axis).
• PUDT setting
D The touch probe fails to contact the When using the FM type touch probe, OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at a signal reception is not correct.
middle approach feedrate (X-axis).
• POVT setting
4765-E P-166
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
E The touch probe fails to contact the Check the touch probe battery. OO10
final approach feedrate (X-axis).
F The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has chat- OO10
approach feedrate (Y-axis). When
middle approach feedrate (Y-axis).
final approach feedrate (Y-axis).
approach feedrate (Z-axis). When
middle approach feedrate (Z-axis).
final approach feedrate (Z-axis).
into contact with a workpiece (Z-axis).
18 The touch probe contacts the work- Check the following items: OO10
piece during the approach to the exter-
• Start point of the gauging cycle
nal diameter in the OD gauging cycle.
• Assumed OD value
19 PLH is not designated. Set tool length offset number for PLH.
1A PDH is not designated. Set the cutter radius compensation
number for PDH.
4765-E P-167
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
1B In the C-axis gauging cycle, contact is Check the following items: OO10
detected during the approach to the
• Is start point of the C-axis gauging
gauging point.
cycle correct?
• Is PDl value correct?
• Is PGI value correct?
1C Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
X-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1D Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
Y-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1E Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
Z-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1F In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
for the vertical spindle longitudinal close to the touch sensor
tact the sensor.
20 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
for the vertical spindle radial direction, close to the touch sensor
the cutting tool fails to contact the sen- (within 10 mm)?
sor.
21 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start position of the cycle; is OO30
for horizontal spindle longitudinal it close to the touch sensor
tact the sensor.
22 In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
automatic tool breakage detection close to the touch sensor
cycle for the horizontal spindle in the (within 10 mm)?
contact the sensor.
23 When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the OO100
has already been on. (X direction)
has already been on. (Y direction)
has already been on. (Z direction)
4765-E P-168
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
approach (X direction), the value is
approach (Y direction), the value is
approach (Z direction), the value is
29 In the automatic tool length offset/ Check if the anticipated tool length is OO30
automatic tool breakage detection correct. (for tool length offset cycle)
cycle for the vertical spindle in the lon-
gitudinal direction, the cutting tools
fails to contact the sensor.
2A In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
radial direction, the cutting tools fails to
contact the sensor. • Is the cutter radius offset data set?
2B In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
cycle for the horizontal spindle in the
longitudinal direction, the cutting tool
fails to contact the sensor. • Is the cutter radius offset data set?
2C In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
• Is the anticipated cutter radius
correct? (for tool length offset
cycle)
contact the sensor.
• Is the cutter radius offset data set?
2D In the automatic tool length offset cycle Check if PL1 is appropriate. OO30
in the X-axis direction (with angular
attachment), the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
33 In the U-center zero setting cycle, the Check the following items:
cutting bit contacts the sensor, or the
contact signal is input, in a sequence
rectly?
in which the cutting bit should not con-
tact the sensor. • Is the cutting bit free of chips?
• Is the sensor signal correct?
4765-E P-169
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
34 In the U-center zero setting cycle, no Check the following items:
contact signal is input.
• Is PD value correct?
to the CNC?
sequence in which contact must not be • Is the sensor signal correctly input
detected. to the CNC?
the cutting bit fails to contact the touch
• Is the U-axis command too large?
sensor.
to the CNC?
37 In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
sensor in the sequence in which the U-
axis adjusted amount is checked on
the Y-axis.
38 In the tool breakage detection cycle, Check the following items:
rectly?
sequence in which contact must not be
detected. • Is the sensor signal correctly input
to the CNC?
39 In the tool wear compensation cycle, Check the following items:
sor in a sequence in which the Y-axis
positioning is executed to a point dis- • Is the U-center bit free of chips?
tanced from the current position by the
compensation amount.
to the CNC?
3A In the tool wear compensation cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
sensor in a sequence in which the cut-
ting bit radial position is corrected in
the U-axis adjusting cycle.
3B After the completion of U-axis com- Check if the sensor signal is correctly
pensation in the tool wear compensa- input to the CNC.
tion cycle, the cutting bit fails to
contact the touch sensor in the
sequence in which the adjusted
amount is checked in the Y-axis move-
ment.
3C When the gauging cycle is executed Execute the gauging cycle after index- OO10
with a touch probe set in the vertical ing the swivel head to the M75 (rear)
spindle of the MCM, swivel head is not position.
in the M75 (rear) position.
4765-E P-170
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
3D In the touch sensor zero setting cycle • Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the vertical spindle in the longitudi- the swivel head to the M73 (front)
nal direction on the MCM, the swivel position.
head is not in the M73 (front) position,
3E In the touch sensor zero setting cycle • Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the vertical spindle in the radial the swivel head to the M73 (front)
is not in the M73 (front) position, or the
3F In the touch sensor zero setting cycle • Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the horizontal spindle in the longitu- the swivel head to the M76 (right)
dinal direction on the MCM, the swivel position.
head is not in the M76 (right) position,
40 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle • Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the horizontal spindle in the radial the swivel head to the M76 (right)
is not in the M76 (right) position, or the
41 The tool number for the angular Check if the T command is correct.
attachment is T52 or T53. (For the
angular attachment tool, only T51 (90°
angular attachment) can be used for
tool length offset).
touch probe cannot be turned on. OO18
touch probe cannot be turned off. OO19
4765-E P-171
10. Examples of Gauging Result Display

(1) Result of ID gauging
ME51326R0200400640001
(2) Result of OD gauging
ME51326R0200400640002
4765-E P-172
(3) Result of end face gauging (X-axis)
ME51326R0200400640003
(4) Result of end face gauging (Y-axis)
ME51326R0200400640004
4765-E P-173
(5) Result of end face gauging (Z-axis)
ME51326R0200400640005
(6) Result of calculation of the center/distance between two points
ME51326R0200400640006
4765-E P-174
SECTION 3 MANUAL GAUGING
1. Overview
1-1. Specifications
The manual gauging function is used to set the zero point, tool length offset data, etc., using a touch
probe or a touch sensor.
Differing from the automatic gauging and automatic tool length offset functions, the manual gauging
function sets the data in an interactive operation using comments displayed on the screen and also
specially provided switches. Therefore, the operator does not have to learn special gauging func-
tion programs.
This function allows you easy and quick data setting without referring to the programming manual,
and can be used effectively in the following cases:
• Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining a one-of-a-kind workpiece
• Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining the first workpiece, and begin-
ning production from the next workpiece, using the set data.
• Setting the zero point or the tool offset data when performing machining jobs by interrupting lot
production using the same part program.
4765-E P-175
1-2. Overview of Manual Gauging Functions

The following is an outline of the manual gauging functions.
General configuration of manual gauging functions is shown in [1-3. List of Display Screens].
1-2-1. Work Gauging Function
The work gauging function measures the workpiece length, hole diameter, center position, etc.
using a touch probe, and executes zero offset. Zero offset is automatically executed after the com-
pletion of a gauging cycle. To execute only measurement, skip the zero offset process.
This work gauging function provides the following gauging patterns. Choose the appropriate pattern
according to the shape of the target to be measured.
(1) End face (X, Y, Z)
(2) Center of ID
(3) Center of OD
(4) Center between two internal faces
(5) Center between two external faces
(6) Inclination and corner
ME51326R0200500030001
[Supplement]
Refer to [3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles] for the preparation
necessary before starting a work gauging cycle.
4765-E P-176
1-2-2. Tool Length Gauging Function
The tool length gauging function measures the tool length using a touch sensor and executes tool
offset according to the result of gauging.
Use a reference tool, or a tool of whose length from the gauge line to the tool nose is known, as a
gauge.
ME51326R0200500040001
Either of the following two types of tool offset is executed.

The difference between the measured length and the length of the tool used as the gauge is
taken as the tool length offset data.
Reference
tool
"L" is registered as the tool length offset data.

ME51326R0200500040002

The length from the gauge line to the tool nose is taken as the tool length offset data.
Gauge line
"L" is registered as the tool length offset data.

ME51326R0200500040003
4765-E P-177
[Supplement]
Refer to [3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles] for the preparation
necessary before starting a tool length gauging cycle.
1-2-3. Cutter Radius Gauging Function
The cutter radius gauging function measures the radius of a tool with a touch sensor oriented hori-
zontally, and executes cutter radius compensation according to the result of gauging.
Use a reference tool or a tool whose radius is known as a gauge.
ME51326R0200500050001
[Supplement]
Refer to [3-2. Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle] for the preparation necessary
before starting a cutter radius gauging cycle.
4765-E P-178
1-2-4. Gauging Preparation Function
The gauging preparation function is provided to perform the preparatory steps required for the work
gauging, tool length gauging or cutter radius gauging function. Execute this gauging preparation
function before starting a manual gauging cycle.
ME51326R0200500060001
• Preparation for starting a work gauging cycle

Before starting a work gauging cycle, set the length offset data and the radius compensation
data (in the four directions X+, X-, Y+ and Y-) of the touch probe.
After selecting “A. PREPARATION OF WORK GAUGING/TOOL LENGTH GAUGING”, execute
the preparation functions in the order indicated below.
a. A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL)
b. A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET
c. A-3. TOUCH PROBE RADIUS COMP
[Supplement]
1) Once length offset and radius compensation have been executed for the touch probe, they do
not need to be executed every time a work gauging cycle is executed. Execute them from
time to time as needed.
2) After a feeler has been replaced or a feeler strikes a workpiece or other object, touch probe
length offset/radius compensation must always be executed.
3) To obtain high accuracy in the work gauging operation, the run-out of the touch probe must be
minimized.
• Preparation for starting a tool length gauging cycle

Before starting a tool length gauging cycle, select “A. PREPARATION OF WORK GAUGING/
TOOL LENGTH GAUGING” then execute “A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL)”.
• Preparation for starting a cutter radius gauging cycle

Before starting a cutter radius gauging cycle, select “B. PREPARATION OF CUTTER RADIUS
GAUGING” then execute “B-1. REF POS SET FOR CUTTER RADIUS COMP”.
1-3.
Manual Gauging Menu

List of Display Screens
Work Gauging Menu Tool Length Gauging Cutter Radius Gauging Gauging Preparation Menu
End Face Center between Two Center between Two Inclination

OD Center ID Center
(X, Y, Z) External Faces Internal Faces and Corner
Reference Face Setting Touch Probe Radius Reference Position Setting for
Touch Probe Length Offset
(Reference Tool) Compensation Cutter Radius Compensation
The screens used for manual gauging operation and configuration of them are shown below.
4765-E P-179
ME51326R0200500070001
4765-E P-180
2. Basic Operation
Since manual gauging is executed in the manual operation mode, all manual operations, such as
rapid feed, jog feed, and pulse handle feed, are permitted during the execution of a gauging cycle.
When moving an axis to a position close to the target, move it at a rapid feedrate, and for the detec-
tion of contact of the touch probe or touch sensor, move the axis using the pulse handle.
The desired manual gauging function can be selected from the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.
Display the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen by following the procedure indicated below, then
perform the desired function.
Procedure :
1 Select the manual mode.
2 Press function key MANUAL GAUGING [F2].

The operation mode changes to the manual gauging mode and the MANUAL GAUGING
MENU screen is displayed.
[Supplement]
If function key MANUAL GAUGING [F2] is not displayed, press the [EXTENSION] key so that the
MANUAL GAUGING function is assigned to [F2].
ME51326R0200500080001
4765-E P-181
3. Preparation for Gauging

The gauging preparation function is provided to perform the preparatory steps required for a work
gauging, tool length gauging or cutter radius gauging function. Execute this function before starting
a manual gauging cycle by following the procedure indicated below.
3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles
Procedure :
1 Prepare a touch sensor, touch probe, master ring and sling gauge.
2 Mount the touch sensor and the master ring on the table.
3 Select the manual operation mode.

The screen shown below will be displayed.
ME51326R0200500100001
4765-E P-182
4 Press function key MANUAL GAUGING [F2].

The MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, shown below, will be displayed.
ME51326R0200500100002
5 Press function key GAUGING PREPAR [F4].

The GAUGING PREPARATION menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.
ME51326R0200500100003
[Supplement]
The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON” is displayed on a menu
screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cur-
sor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.
4765-E P-183
6 Press function key WORK/TOOL LEN [F1].

The A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL) screen, shown below, will be displayed.
ME51326R0200500100004
7 Move the table to a position where ATC operation will not cause interference.
8 Move the cursor to “NXT TOOL”, input the tool number of the reference tool and press the
WRITE key.
9 Press the 1 CYCLE START key on the ATC operation panel to mount the reference tool in the
spindle.
10 Bring the reference tool into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Feed the reference tool with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The touch sensor red LED lights when the reference tool contacts the touch sensor.
Reference tool
Touch sensor
Red LED (lit)
ME51326R0200500100005
Execute zero offset at this position to store the touch sensor position.
System zero offset No. 10 is used exclusively for registering the touch sensor position and not
used in an ordinary program.
4765-E P-184
11 Move the cursor to “ZERO OFFSET X” and the following comment is displayed.
“WRITE A 0”
ME51326R0200500100006
12 Input “0” as instructed by the comment.

The zero offset data X is rewritten and the X coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to “0”.
The cursor automatically moves to “ZERO OFFSET Y”.
13 Input “0” for Y also.

The Y coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to “0” and the cursor automatically moves to
“ZERO OFFSET Z”.
The following comment is displayed when the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET Z”.
“WRITE A 0 FOR A REL OFST OR WRITE THE REF TOOL-1 FOR A ABS OFST.”
14 Input “0” and press the WRITE key.

The zero offset data displayed on the screen is automatically rewritten and the Z coordinate
value of ACT POSIT changes to “0”.
The preparatory steps for tool length gauging are now complete.
For a work gauging cycle, proceed to the following after pressing function key NEXT [F7].
[Supplement]
If the absolute offset type is selected, the distance between the gauge line and the tool nose
is written. In this case, the written value is set for the coordinate value of ACT POSIT.
4765-E P-185
15 Move the reference tool away from the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle then move
the table to a position where ATC operation will not cause interference.
16 With the A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL) screen displayed, press function key
NEXT [F7].
The A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET screen, shown below, will be displayed.
Tool length offset No. 21 is exclusively used for storing the touch probe length offset data.
ME51326R0200500100007
17 Move the cursor to “NEXT TOOL” and the following comment is displayed.
“WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER AND START ATC 1 CYCLE”
18 Input the tool number of the touch probe as instructed by the comment.
19 Press the 1 CYCLE START key on the ATC operation panel to mount the touch probe to the
spindle. The “NEXT TOOL” column now shows NONE.
20 The cursor automatically moves to “TOOL LENGTH OFFSET” and the following comment is
displayed on the screen.
“PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
21 Bring the touch probe into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Feed the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The red LED of both the touch sensor and the touch probe lights when the touch probe con-
tacts the touch sensor.
22 At the contact position, press the WRITE key.

The tool length offset data is rewritten.
This completes the length offset operation for the touch probe. Press function key NEXT [F7]
to execute the touch probe radius compensation.
4765-E P-186
23 In the state the A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET screen is displayed, press function
key NEXT [F7].
The A-3. TOUCH PROBE RADIUS COMP screen, shown below, is displayed with the follow-
ing comment.
“FIND THE REF RING CENTER AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON AT THAT POS”
ME51326R0200500100008
24 Move the cursor to “REF RING DIA”, and the following comment is displayed.
“WRITE THE DIAMETER OF THE REFERENCE RING”
25 Input the diameter of the master ring and press the WRITE key.
The cursor moves to “REF POSITION X” and the following comment is displayed.
“FIND THE REF RING CENTER AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON AT THAT POS”
26 Manually remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge.
27 Bring the sling gauge into contact with the master ring by operating the pulse handle. Align the
spindle center with the master ring center by turning the spindle.
Sling gauge
Master ring
Table
ME51326R0200500100009
28 While the spindle center is aligned with the master ring center, make sure that the cursor is on
“REF RING CENTER X” and press the WRITE key.
4765-E P-187
29 Move the cursor to “REF RING CENTER Y” and press the WRITE key.
The ACT POSIT data of X and Y will be “X0” and “Y0”. Note that the Z-axis coordinate value
may not be set.
30 Manually remove the sling gauge from the spindle and mount the touch probe.
31 Manually orient the spindle.
32 Manually move the touch probe into the master ring approximately 7 mm by operating the
pulse handle, then move it into the X+ side (position 1 in the guide diagram) to make it contact
the master ring.
Be sure to select the “x1” multiplication ratio to bring the touch probe into contact with the mas-
ter ring.
The red LED of the touch probe lights when contact is detected.
33 Move the cursor to “RAD COMP 1 (+X Ds21)” and press the WRITE key.
34 Repeat the same steps for “RAD COMP 2”, “RAD COMP 3” and “RAD COMP 4”.
Note that the ACT POSIT data must be “0” when setting the touch probe radius compensation
data as indicated below.
ACT POSIT Y = 0 for setting “RAD COMP 1 (+X)” and “RAD COMP 2 (-X)”
ACT POSIT X = 0 for setting “RAD COMP 3 (+Y)” and “RAD COMP 4 (-Y)”
35 When the compensation data is displayed for all of “RAD COMP 1 (+X)” to “RAD COMP 4 (-
Y)”, check the displayed data.
Preferably, mutual differences should be within 0.03 mm.
This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation.

The screen returns to the GAUGING PREPARATION screen.

The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.
4765-E P-188
3-2. Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle
Procedure :
1 With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen is displayed, press function key CUTTER RADIUS
[F2].
For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [3-1. Preparation
for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles].
The B-1. REF POS SET FOR CUTTER RADIUS COMP screen, shown below, will be dis-
played.
ME51326R0200500110001
2 After moving the cursor to “REF TOOL DIA”, input the diameter of the reference tool and press
the WRITE key.
The cursor moves to “REF POSITION X” and the following comment is displayed.
“MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
3 Manually orient the spindle.
4 Bring the reference tool into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Feed the reference tool with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The touch sensor red LED lights when the reference tool contacts the touch sensor.
5 At the position where contact is detected, press the WRITE key.

The data at “REF POSITION X” is rewritten and the X coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes
to “0”.
The cursor moves to “REF POSITION Y”.
6 Press the WRITE key.

The data at “REF POSITION Y” is rewritten and the Y coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes
to “0”.
The cursor moves to “REF POSITION Z”.
4765-E P-189

The data at “REF POSITION Z” is rewritten and the Z coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes
to “0”.
This completes the preparation for cutter radius gauging operation.

The screen returns to the GAUGING PREPARATION screen.

4765-E P-190
4. Work Gauging
4-1. End Face Gauging (X, Y, Z)

End face gauging is used for setting the zero point at the end face.
Procedure :
1 With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key WORK GAUGING
[F1].
For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Opera-
tion].
The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.
ME51326R0200500120001
[Supplement]
4765-E P-191
2 Press function key X,Y,Z END FACE [F1].

The WORK GAUGING 1. X,Y,Z END FACE screen, shown below, is displayed.
ME51326R0200500120002
The cursor moves to “AXIS SELECT” and the following comment is displayed.
“SELECT AXIS BY CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
4765-E P-192
3 Move the cursor to an axis position (+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z) as instructed by the comment and
press the WRITE key to select an axis.
The axis name of the selected axis is displayed for “AXIS SELECT” and the cursor moves to
“END FACE POS”.
ME51326R0200500120003
For “ZERO OFFSET NO.” and the “H” number of ACT POSIT, the currently valid zero offset
number is displayed. In the example screen above, “H1” is displayed for both items.
[Supplement]
To execute only a gauging cycle without zero offset, select the zero offset number for which
the gauging cycle is to be executed in the MDI mode and perform a manual gauging opera-
tion.
The following comment is displayed.

“TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
4 Bring the touch probe into contact with the end face to be measured as instructed by the com-
ment. For this operation, use the pulse handle.
Feed the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The touch probe red LED lights when it contacts the end face.
4765-E P-193

The end face position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor
moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”
ME51326R0200500120004

“WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”
6 Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE
key.
The data for all of “END FACE POS”, “ZERO OFFSET”, and “SCT POS” is changed to the data
in the selected work coordinate system.
When “ZERO OFFSET NO.” is written, the cursor moves to the “ZERO OFFSET” data position.
ME51326R0200500120005
4765-E P-194

“WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”
7 Input the end face position data (X, Y, Z) in the new work coordinate system, as instructed by
the comment, and press the WRITE key.
To set the end face position to “0”, input “0”, and to set the end face position to “-50”, input “-
50”.
The set end face position (X, Y, Z) is displayed at “END FACE POS” on the screen and the
ZERO OFFSET data is automatically rewritten.
The cursor returns to “AXIS SELECT”.
ME51326R0200500120006
8 To execute the same gauging cycle for other axes, repeat steps 3) to 7) for the desired axes.
9 After finishing gauging for all desired axes, press function key CLOSE [F8].
The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen.

4765-E P-195
4-2. I.D. Center Gauging

I.D center gauging is used to set the zero point at the center of an I.D.
This function calculates the center of the specified I.D. by bringing the touch probe into contact with
four points on the I.D.
Procedure :
[F1].
tion].
ME51326R0200500130001
[Supplement]
4765-E P-196
2 Press function key I.D. CENTER [F2].

The WORK GAUGING 2. I.D. CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.
ME51326R0200500130002
The cursor is positioned on “TOUCH POS 1” with the following comment displayed on the
screen.
“POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND THE CENTER
TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 1 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
3 Position the touch probe near contact position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram) and bring it
into contact with the I.D. at position 1 as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to
move the touch probe for contact detection.
Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected.

The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are
displayed.
The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2” and The following comment is displayed on the screen.
“TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 2 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
5 Position the touch probe near contact position 2 (position 2 in the guide diagram) by moving it
only in the X-axis direction, and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 2 as instructed by
the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection.
Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect contact.
If the Y-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message
is displayed.
4244 there axis not indicated has been moved
This alarm is automatically cleared when the Y-axis coordinate value in the machine coordi-
nate system agrees with the Y data of TOUCH POS 1.
4765-E P-197

displayed.
The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 3” and the following comment is displayed on the screen.
“TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 1 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS WRITE BUTTON
TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 3 TO MOVE Y AXIS & PRESS WRITE BUTTON”

displayed.
“TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 4 TO MOVE Y AXIS & PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
only in the Y-axis direction, and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 4 as instructed by
the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection.
If the X-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message
is displayed.
This alarm is automatically cleared when the X-axis coordinate value in the machine coordi-

The coordinate values of the contact position, in the presently selected coordinate system, are
displayed. The cursor moves to “CENTER POS/RAD”.
ME51326R0200500130003
4765-E P-198
11 With the cursor on “CENTER POS/RAD”, press the WRITE key.

The data is automatically displayed as shown below and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET
NO.”.
ME51326R0200500130004
When the cursor comes to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, The following comment is displayed.
key.
The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CENTER POS/RAD”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT”, with
the exception of “D”, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
ME51326R0200500130005
4765-E P-199
When the data is set for “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET X” and
the following comment is displayed.
OFFSET X” and the following comment is displayed.
13 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the I.D. center in the new coordinate system and press
the WRITE key.
The set I.D. center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data
of “TOUCH POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly.
The cursor automatically returns to “TOUCH POS.1”.
ME51326R0200500130006
This completes the I.D center gauging operation.


4765-E P-200
4-3. O.D. Center Gauging

O.D. center gauging is used to set the zero point at the center of an I.D.
This function calculates the center of the specified I.D. by bringing the touch probe into contact with
four points on the I.D.
Procedure :
[F1].
tion].
ME51326R0200500140001
[Supplement]
4765-E P-201
2 Press function key O.D. CENTER [F3].

The WORK GAUGING 3. O.D. CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.
ME51326R0200500140002
The cursor is positioned on “TOUCH POS 1” with the following comment displayed on the
screen.
“FEED THE TOUCH PROBE CLOSE TO THE WORKPIECE POSITION1

displayed.
The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2” and The following comment is displayed on the screen.
“POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND 2 SHOWN IN DRAWING TO MOVE Z & X AXIS
only in the X- and Z-axis direction and bring it into contact with the O.D. at position 2 by moving
it only in the X-axis direction as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the
touch probe for contact detection.
If the Y-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message
is displayed.
This alarm is automatically cleared when the Y-axis coordinate value in the machine coordi-
4765-E P-202

displayed.
“TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 3 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS WRITE BUTTON

displayed.
“POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND 4 SHOWN IN DRAWING TO MOVE Z & Y AXIS
only in the Y- and Z-axis direction and bring it into contact with the O.D. at position 4 by moving
it only in the Y-axis direction as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the
touch probe for contact detection.
If the X-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message
is displayed.
This alarm is automatically cleared when the X-axis coordinate value in the machine coordi-
4765-E P-203

displayed. The cursor moves to “CENTER POS/RAD”.
ME51326R0200500140003

11 With the cursor on “CENTER POS/RAD”, press the WRITE key.

The data is automatically displayed as shown below and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET
NO.”.
ME51326R0200500140004
4765-E P-204
When the cursor comes to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, the following comment is displayed.
key.
The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CENTER POS/RAD”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT”, with
the exception of “D”, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
ME51326R0200500140005
4765-E P-205
13 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the I.D. center in the new coordinate system and press
the WRITE key.
The set O.D. center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data
of “TOUCH POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly.
The cursor automatically returns to “TOUCH POS.1”.
ME51326R0200500140006
This completes the O.D. center gauging operation.


4765-E P-206
4-4. Internal Faces Center Gauging

The center gauging function for two internal faces (groove center gauging function) is used to set
the zero point at the center of the two internal faces.
The function provides two modes of operation to calculate the center - 2-point contact and 3-point
contact.
4-4-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact
Which of the gauging modes is used can be selected by parameter setting or by using the buttons
on the screen.
• Selection by parameter
To select the contact mode by parameter setting, use CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 48, bit
3.
Without check mark: 2-point contact
With check mark: 3-point contact
[Supplement]
If the gauging mode is selected by parameter, the screen display is not changed unless the
screen is closed and redisplayed.
• Selection with buttons

For selecting the gauging mode, the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons are provided
on the screen. Select the desired gauging pattern by pressing the corresponding button.
ME51326R0200500160001
Procedure :
1 Move the cursor to either of the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons.

The gauging mode is selected and the corresponding screen is displayed.
4765-E P-207
4-4-2. Internal Face Center Gauging in 2-point Contact Mode
The function calculates the center of two internal faces by bringing the touch probe into contact with
the internal faces at two points.
To use this function, the 2-point contact mode must be selected. If the 3-point contact mode is pres-
ently selected, change the gauging mode to the 2-point contact mode by referring to [4-4-1. Select-
ing 2-point/3-point Contact].
Procedure :
[F1].
tion].
ME51326R0200500170001
[Supplement]
4765-E P-208
2 Press function key INT END CENTER [F4].

The WORK GAUGING 4. INT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.
ME51326R0200500170002
The following comment is displayed on the screen.

3 Select the axis (X or Y) used for gauging and press the WRITE key as instructed by the com-
ment.
The selected axis is displayed at “AXIS SELECT” and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 1”.
ME51326R0200500170003

“TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”.
4765-E P-209
4 Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into con-
tact with the end face.
Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection.
The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe contacts the end face.

moves to “TOUCH POS 2”.
6 Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact the other end face, then press the
WRITE key.
When position 2 is set, the cursor moves to “CENTER POS”.
ME51326R0200500170004

4765-E P-210
7 Press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment.

The coordinate values of the center position are automatically displayed and the cursor moves
to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.
ME51326R0200500170005

key.
The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CENTER POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT”, with the
exception of “L”, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
ME51326R0200500170006
4765-E P-211
9 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two internal faces in the
new coordinate system and press the WRITE key.
The set center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data of
“TOUCH POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly.
The cursor automatically returns to “AXIS SELECT”.
ME51326R0200500170007
This completes the internal face center gauging operation.


4765-E P-212
4-4-3. Internal Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode
This function calculates the center of two internal faces by bringing the touch probe into contact with
the internal faces at three points.
[Supplement]
Even if the 3-point contact mode is selected, it is possible to calculate the center position by
bringing the touch probe into contact with the internal faces at two points. For details, refer to [4-
4-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode].
Procedure :
[F1].
tion].
ME51326R0200500180001
[Supplement]
4765-E P-213
2 Press function key INT END CENTER [F4].

The WORK GAUGING 4. INT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed with the cursor
positioned at “TOUCH POS 1”.
ME51326R0200500180002

“TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON IF 2 POSITIONS GAUGING,
SELECT AXIS”
[Supplement]
To execute gauging with touch probe contact at only two points, move the cursor “AXIS
SELECT”, select an axis (X or Y), then move the cursor “TOUCH POS 1” again.
tact with the internal face at position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram).
The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe detects a contact.
4 At the position where the contact is detected, press the WRITE key.
“TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON
IF SELECTING 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, DON’T GAUGE THIS POSITION”
4765-E P-214
5 Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact position 2 and position 3 (posi-
tions 2 and 3 in the guide diagram).
[Supplement]
1) At positions 1 and 2, gauging is executed on one internal face, and at position 3, gauging
is executed on the other internal face that is parallel to the first internal face.
2) To execute this gauging operation by bringing the touch probe into contact with the inter-
nal faces at two points, skip the contact at position 2 (TOUCH POS 2).
When positions 2 and 3 are set, the cursor moves to “CENTER POS”.
ME51326R0200500180003

4765-E P-215

The data is automatically displayed for “CENTER POS”, “distance between end faces (L)” and
“inclination angle (β)”, then the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.
ME51326R0200500180004
The data is obtained in the manner indicated below for each item.
CENTER POS: The center position between positions 1 and 3 is calculated
assuming that the end faces are parallel to each other.
Distance between end faces (L): The distance between two end faces in the right angle direc-
tion to the faces is calculated assuming that the inclined
face gauged at positions 1 and 2 and the other face gauged
at position 3 are parallel with each other.
Inclination angle (β): The angle made between the inclined face gauged at posi-
tions 1 and 2, and the X-axis is calculated.
4765-E P-216
key.
The input number is displayed at “ZERO OFFSET NO.” and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFF-
SET” data position.
ME51326R0200500180005

8 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two end faces in the new
coordinate system and press the WRITE key.
ME51326R0200500180006
4765-E P-217
This completes the internal face center gauging (3-point contact mode) operation.


4-4-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode
To obtain the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact at only two points after select-
ing the 3-point contact mode, the operation procedure differs from the normal gauging operation in
the following points.
• Selection of an axis is necessary.
• Contact detection is not carried out at position 2 but must be carried out at positions 1 and 3.
• “Center position”, “distance between end faces” and “inclination angle” are calculated as indi-
cated below.
Center position: The center between positions 1 and 3
Distance between end faces Distance between positions 1 and 3
(L):
Inclination angle (β): If the X-axis is selected for “AXIS SELECT”, this angle is 90°.
If the Y-axis is selected for “AXIS SELECT”, this angle is 0°.
[Supplement]
To execute gauging at only two points although the 3-point contact mode is selected, no data
must be displayed for “TOUCH POS 2” (immediately after the data is cleared or the start of this
gauging operation).
For details of operation, refer to [4-4-3. Internal Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode].
4765-E P-218
4-5. External Faces Center Gauging

The center gauging function for two external faces (projection center gauging function) is used to set
the zero point at the center of the two external faces.
The function provides two modes of operation to calculate the center - 2-point contact and 3-point
contact.
4-5-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact
Which of the gauging modes is used can be selected by parameter setting or by using the buttons
on the screen.
• Selection by parameter
To select the contact mode by parameter setting, use CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 48, bit
3.
Without check mark: 2-point contact
With check mark: 3-point contact
[Supplement]
If the gauging mode is selected by parameter, the screen display is not changed unless the
screen is closed and redisplayed.
• Selection with buttons

For selecting the gauging mode, the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons are provided
on the screen. Select the desired gauging pattern by pressing the corresponding button.
ME51326R0200500210001
Procedure :
1 Move the cursor to either of the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons.

The gauging mode is selected and the corresponding screen is displayed.
4765-E P-219
4-5-2. External Face Center Gauging in 2-point Contact Mode
The function calculates the center of two external faces by bringing the touch probe into contact with
the external faces at two points.
Procedure :
[F1].
tion].
ME51326R0200500220001
[Supplement]
4765-E P-220
2 Press function key EXT END CENTER [F5].

The WORK GAUGING 5. EXT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.
ME51326R0200500220002

3 Select the axis (X or Y) used for gauging and press the WRITE key as instructed by the com-
ment.
The selected axis is displayed at “AXIS SELECT” and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 1”.
ME51326R0200500220003

“TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”.
4765-E P-221
tact with the end face.
The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe contacts the end face.

6 Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact the other end face, then press the
WRITE key.
When the position 2 is set, the cursor moves to “CENTER POS”.
ME51326R0200500220004

4765-E P-222

The coordinate values of the center position are automatically displayed and the cursor moves
to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.
ME51326R0200500220005

key.
The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CENTER POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT”, with an
exception of “L”, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
When the data is set for “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET X”,
ME51326R0200500220006
4765-E P-223

9 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two external faces in the
new coordinate system and press the WRITE key.
ME51326R0200500220007
This completes the external face center gauging operation.


4765-E P-224
4-5-3. External Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode
The function calculates the center of two external faces by bringing the touch probe into contact with
the external faces at three points.
[Supplement]
Even if the 3-point contact mode is selected, it is possible to calculate the center position by
bringing the touch probe into contact with the external faces at two points. For details, refer to [4-
5-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode].
Procedure :
[F1].
tion].
ME51326R0200500230001
[Supplement]
4765-E P-225
2 Press function key EXT END CENTER [F5].

The WORK GAUGING 5. EXT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed with the cur-
sor positioned at “TOUCH POS 1”.
ME51326R0200500230002

IF 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, SELECT AXIS”
[Supplement]
To execute gauging by making the touch probe contact only at two points, move the cursor
“AXIS SELECT”, select an axis (X or Y), then move the cursor “TOUCH POS 1” again.
tact with the internal face at position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram).
IF SELECTING 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, DON’T GAUGE THIS POSITION”
4765-E P-226
5 Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact position 2 and position 3 (posi-
tions 2 and 3 in the guide diagram).
[Supplement]
1) At positions 1 and 2, gauging is executed on one internal face, and at position 3, gauging
is executed on the other internal face that is parallel to the first internal face.
2) To execute this gauging operation by bringing the touch probe into contact with the exter-
nal faces at two points, skip the contact at position 2 (TOUCH POS 2).
When positions 2 and 3 are set, the cursor moves to “CENTER POS”.
ME51326R0200500230003
The following comment is displayed

4765-E P-227

The data is automatically displayed for “CENTER POS”, “distance between end faces (L)” and
“inclination angle (b)”, then the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.
ME51326R0200500230004
The data for each item is obtained in the manner indicated below.
CENTER POS: The center position between positions 1 and 3 is calculated
assuming that the end faces are parallel to each other.
Distance between end faces (L): The distance between two end faces in the right angle
direction to the faces is calculated assuming that the
inclined face gauged at positions 1 and 2 and the other
face gauged at position 3 are parallel with each other.
Inclination angle (β): The angle made between the inclined face gauged at posi-
tions 1 and 2, and the X-axis is calculated.
4765-E P-228
key.
The input number is displayed at “ZERO OFFSET NO.” and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFF-
SET” data position.
ME51326R0200500230005

8 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two end faces in the new
coordinate system and press the WRITE key.
ME51326R0200500230006
4765-E P-229
This completes the external face center gauging (3-point contact mode) operation.


4-5-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode
To obtain the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact only at two points after select-
ing the 3-point contact mode, the operation procedure differs from the normal gauging operation in
the following points.
• Selection of an axis is necessary.
• Contact detection is not carried out at position 2 but must be carried out at positions 1 and 3.
• “Center position”, “distance between end faces” and “inclination angle” are calculated as indi-
cated below.
Center position: The center between positions 1 and 3
Distance between end faces (L): Distance between positions 1 and 3
Inclination angle (β): If X-axis is selected for “AXIS SELECT”, this angle is 90°.
If Y-axis is selected for “AXIS SELECT”, this angle is 0°.
[Supplement]
To execute gauging only at two points although the 3-point contact mode is selected, no data
must be displayed for “TOUCH POS 2” (immediately after the data is cleared or the start of this
gauging operation).
For details of operation, refer to [4-5-3. External Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode].
4765-E P-230
4-6. Inclination and Corner Gauging

This function is used to determine the zero point on the X- and Y-axis for workpieces that are not
mounted parallel to these axes.
Note that although the zero offset is automatically executed for the X- and Y-axis, zero offset for
inclination is not carried out automatically and therefore the data must be reflected to the part pro-
gram as necessary.
Procedure :
[F1].
tion].
ME51326R0200500250001
[Supplement]
4765-E P-231
2 Press function key INCLINE, CORNER [F2].

The WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen is displayed.
ME51326R0200500250002

“SELECT CORNER BY CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
3 Select the corner where gauging is to be executed from “GAUGING CORNER (A, B, C, D)” as
instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key.
The colors of the arrow symbol, and the related number and corner name automatically
change.
ME51326R0200500250003
4765-E P-232
The direction of gauging at a contact detection position differs depending on the selected cor-
ner as shown below.
GAUGING CORNER Contact Position 1 Contact Position 2 Contact Position 3

CORNER A Y+ Y+ X+
CORNER B Y+ Y+ X-
CORNER C Y- Y- X-
CORNER D Y- Y- X+
The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 1”.
ME51326R0200500250004

“MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”
4 Bring the touch probe into contact with the workpiece at position 1 (position 1 in the guide dia-
gram) using the pulse handle as instructed by the comment.
Feed the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection.
The corner position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor
4765-E P-233
6 Execute gauging at contact positions 2 and 3 (positions 2 and 3 in the guide drawing) using the
same operation.
The cursor moves to “CORNER POS/ANG”.
ME51326R0200500250005


The data of the corner, and the angle, are automatically displayed and the cursor moves to
“ZERO OFST NO.”
ME51326R0200500250006

4765-E P-234
key.
The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CORNER POS/ANG”, “ZERO OFST NO.” and “ACT POSIT”, with
the exception of “angle β”, are updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
9 When the zero offset number is set, the cursor moves to “CORNER SET”.
ME51326R0200500250007

“WRITE THE CORNER POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”
10 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the corner in the new coordinate system and press the
WRITE key.
The cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET”.
ME51326R0200500250008
4765-E P-235


The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CORNER POS/ANG”, “ZERO OFST NO.” and “ACT POSIT” is
automatically updated and the cursor returns to “GAUGING CORNER”.
ME51326R0200500250009
This completes the inclination/corner gauging operation.


[Supplement]
1) The function assumes that angles at a corner (A, B, C, D) are right angles.
2) The angle value (β) is the angle made between the X-axis and the line defined by contact
detection positions 1 and 2.
3) The angle value (β) displayed at “β” of “CAL. RESULT” is registered in system common vari-
ables VS65.
4) The value set for VS65 cannot be directly displayed on the screen. It is cleared when the
power is turned off.
To check the value set for VS65 or to retain the value after turning the power off, perform the
following steps.
4765-E P-236
Procedure :
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Input “VC =VS65”.

Input a normal common variable number for “ ”.
4 Press the CYCLE START button.

The value set for VS65 is set at VC .
Once the value is set for a common variable, the value can be checked by displaying the
parameter setting screen.
[Supplement]
In a program, specify the commands like “G11 P=VC ”.

4765-E P-237
5. Tool Length Gauging

The tool length gauging function is used to set the tool length offset data.
Procedure :
1 In the state the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen is displayed, press function key TOOL
LENGTH GAUGING [F2].
For the procedure for displaying the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, refer to [2. Basic
Operation].
The TOOL LENGTH GAUGING screen, shown below, will be displayed.
ME51326R0200500260001
[Supplement]

“WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER BY SET AND START ATC 1 CYCLE”
2 Input the tool number of the tool to be gauged to “NEXT TOOL” and press the WRITE key as
instructed by the comment.
4765-E P-238
3 Press the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC operation panel to mount the tool to be
gauged in the spindle.
The tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle is displayed at “ACT TOOL”.
ME51326R0200500260002
The cursor moves to “TOOL-L OFST NO.” and the following comment is displayed.
“WRITE THE TOOL LENGTH OFFSET NUMBER”
4 Input the tool length offset number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key.
The cursor moves to “TOOL-L OFFSET”.
ME51326R0200500260003

“MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”.
4765-E P-239
5 Bring the tool into contact with the touch sensor, as instructed by the comment, by operating
the pulse handle.
Move the tool with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection.

The tool length offset data is displayed.
This completes the tool length gauging operation when the tool offset data of other tools is not
measured.
To execute the tool length gauging cycle for other tools, proceed to the next step.
7 Move the cursor to “ACT TOOL”.
8 Input the tool number to “ACT TOOL” and press the WRITE key.
The cursor moves to “POT NO.” and the following comment is displayed.
“WRITE THE RETURN DESTINATION POT NUMBER BY SET ( WHEN NOT SET)”
9 Input the return tool pot number or “ ” as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE
key.
When the return pot number is set, pressing the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC opera-
tion panel causes the tool to be returned to the specified pot.
If an attempt is made to call another tool by setting its number at “NEXT TOOL” while a return
pot number is set at “POT NO.”, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message is displayed
on the screen.
“5266 Pot command exist”.
To avoid this, input “ ” for “POT NO.” and press the WRITE key. This causes “NA” to be set
for “POT NO.”, allowing the next tool set for “NEXT TOOL” to be called.
After calling the next tool, repeat steps 4) to 9) for all tools for which the tool length offset data
should be set.

4765-E P-240
6. Cutter Radius Gauging

The cutter radius gauging function is used to set the cutter radius compensation data.
Procedure :
1 In the state the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen is displayed, press function key CUTTER
RADIUS [F3].
For the procedure for displaying the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, refer to [2. Basic
Operation].
The CUTTER RAD GAUGING screen, shown below, will be displayed.
ME51326R0200500270001
[Supplement]

4765-E P-241
2 Select the direction of gauging (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by moving the cursor to the desired choice, as
instructed by the comment, and press the WRITE key.
-Y
+X -X
+Y
ME51326R0200500270002
Fig.3-1 Selecting the Gauging Axis

The cursor moves to “NEXT TOOL” and the following message is displayed.
“WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER BY SET AND START ATC 1 CYCLE”
3 Input the tool number of the tool to be gauged at “NEXT TOOL” and press the WRITE key as
instructed by the comment.
4 Press the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC operation panel to mount the tool to be
gauged in the spindle.
5 The spindle is orientated.

The cursor moves to “CUTR-R COMP NO.” and the following comment is displayed.
“WRITE THE CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION NUMBER”
6 Input the cutter radius compensation number as instructed by the comment and press the
WRITE key.
The cursor moves to “CUTR-R COMP”.
ME51326R0200500270003

“MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”.
4765-E P-242
7 Bring the tool into contact with the touch sensor as instructed by the comment by operating the
pulse handle.
Move the tool with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection.

The cutter radius compensation data is displayed.
This completes the cutter radius gauging operation when the cutter radius compensation data
of other tools is not measured.
9 To execute the cutter radius gauging cycle for other tools, repeat the gauging operation steps
indicated above for all tools for which the cutter radius compensation data is to be set.
This completes the cutter radius gauging operation.

For the procedure for setting "ACT TOOL" and "POT NO." refer to [5. Tool Length Gauging].
4765-E P-243
7. Comparison and Calculation of Gauging Results

In conventional gauging operation, absolute gauging results are obtained in the work coordinate
system currently selected. The new manual gauging function allows gauging results to be saved
using the data transfer function and to perform gauging while comparing and calculating gauging
results of various gauging cycles.
Any combination of gauging cycles, for example “INCLINE, CORNER” and “INT END CENTER”, “ID
GAUGING” and “OD GAUGING”, and others, is allowed as long as the results of gauging (to be
explained later) remain on the WORK GAUGING screen. It is also possible to display the results of
comparison/calculation (angle, distance, coordinate value, etc.) WORK GAUGING screens.
ME51326R0200500280001
7-1. Transferring Gauging Results

The procedure for transferring results of gauging after the completion of a gauging cycle is
described below.
Procedure :
1 After the completion of a work gauging cycle, press function key TRANSFER [F7] on the
WORK GAUGING screen.
A comment such as the one indicated below will be displayed.
“INT CENTER (H0) X162.475 INT CENTER (H0) Y147.078 INT CENTER β45.000 THESE
ARE PREVIOUS GAUGING RESULTS WHICH RESULT DO YOU TRANSFER?”
The term such as “INT CENTER” given in the comment represents the mode of the gauging
cycle that was executed to obtain the result.
“INT CENTER (H0) X162.475” in the comment shown in the example screen above means that
the data that was transferred is the X-axis gauging result obtained in the internal face center
gauging operation and that the value is “162.475” in the machine coordinate system (H0).
The comment displayed on the screen includes one of the following terms, which indicate the
gauging mode used.
• “END FACE”: Data transferre as the result of end face gauging operation
4765-E P-244
• “INSIDE DIA”: Data transferred as the result of the I.D. gauging operation
• “OUTSIDE DIA”: Data transferred as the result of the O.D. gauging operation
• “INT CENTER”: Data transferred as the result of the internal end face center gauging
operation
• “EXT CENTER”: Data transferred as the result of the external end face center gauging
operation
• “CORNER”: Data transferred as the result of inclination/corner gauging operation
[Supplement]
The X and Y data, among the transferred data, are coordinate values in the machine coordi-
nate system (H0).
Data “β” represents an angle value.
2 In this state, select the data to be transferred by pressing the corresponding function key.
• POSIT [F1]: Transfers the position data.
• ANGLE [F2]: Transfers the angle data.
• POSIT & ANGLE [F3]: Transfers the position and angle data.
If no data is to be transferred, press function key CANCEL [F8].

If any of function keys POSIT [F1], ANGLEC [F2] and POSIT & ANGLE [F3] is pressed, the
corresponding data obtained in the latest gauging cycle is transferred and stored in the CNC
memory.
The actual data to be transferred depends on the executed work gauging cycle. See the table
below for the relationship between a work gauging cycle and the data to be transferred.
Work Gauging Cycle Transferred Data with [F1] Transferred Data with [F2]
End face gauging (X, Y, Z) End face position 0
I.D. center I.D. center position 0
O.D. center O.D. center position 0
Center position between
Center between two internal faces
two internal faces 0
(2-point contact mode)
(only for the selected axis)
Center between two internal faces Center position between
End face angle
(3-point contact mode) two internal faces
Center position between
Center between two external faces
two external faces 0
(2-point contact mode)
(only for the selected axis)
Center between two external faces Center position between
End face angle
(3-point contact mode) two external faces
Inclination/corner Corner position Workpiece angle
If function key POSIT & ANGLE [F3] is pressed, both the kinds of data selected by POSIT [F1]
and ANGLE [F2] are transferred.
If any of these function keys ([F1], [F2], [F3]) is pressed before a gauging cycle is completed,
no data is transferred and the following comment is displayed on the screen. The previous
transferred data remains.
“NO GAUGING RESULT! CONTINUE GAUGING”
4765-E P-245
3 If the comment indicated above is displayed, press function key CANCEL [F8].
This cancels data transfer mode and allows the operation to be continued.
7-2. Comparison with Gauging Data

Data obtained in other gauging cycles is converted into the values in a pseudo local coordinate sys-
tem on the basis of the transferred data. Angle, distance, and coordinate values (with reference to
the zero point in the local coordinate system) are displayed on each WORK GAUGING screen.
Note that calculation results may not be calculated and displayed depending on the type of gauging
operation, as indicated in the table below.
Gauging Operation Calculation

End face gauging —
I.D. center
O.D. center
Center between two internal
—
faces (2 points)
Center between two internal
faces (3 points)
Center between two external
—
faces (2 points)
Center between two external
faces (3 points)
Inclination/corner
: Calculation results are displayed.

—: Calculation results are not displayed.
7-3. Example of Calculation Results Display

How the calculation results are displayed is described below.
Assume workpiece A shown below is set on the table with a certain angle to the machine coordinate
system. The following is the procedure to obtain the distance between the reference corner position
and the center of hole “a”, and coordinate values of the center of hole “a” in the xy coordinate sys-
tem (pseudo local coordinate system).
ym Hole "a"
Workpiece A
y
75 150
Reference corner position
0 xm
(xm, ym)........Machine coordinate system

(x, y).............Pseudo local coordinate system
ME51326R0200500310001
4765-E P-246
Procedure :
1 At the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen, select “A” for the gauging corner.
2 Bring the touch probe into contact with workpiece A at TOUCH POS 1, TOUCH POS 2, and
TOUCH POS 3 in this order and obtain corner position data and inclination.
3 Press function key TRANSFER [F7] on the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen to
transfer corner position data and the inclination obtained in step 1).
“THESE ARE PREVIOUS GAUGING RESULTS WHICH RESULT DO YOU TRANSFER?”
4 Press function key POSIT & ANGLE [F3].

The corner position data and inclination angle of the workpiece are transferred.
Assume that the X- and Y- coordinate values and inclination of corner transferred as an exam-
ple are x0, y0, β0, respectively, in the machine coordinate system (H0).
ym
Workpiece A
X- and Y-coordinate values of corner

A β0 A are (x0, y0).
y0 H(0)X...................x0
H(0)Y...................y0
Inclination angle..β0
0 x0 xm
ME51326R0200500310002
Fig.3-2 Inclination and Corner Gauging
5 Close the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen once and open the WORK GAUG-
ING 2. I.D. CENTER screen.
6 Set the touch probe inside hole “a” and bring it into contact with the hole I.D. at TOUCH POS 1,
TOUCH POS 2, TOUCH POS 3, and TOUCH POS 4 to set the contact position data.
7 Make sure that the cursor is at “CENTER POS/RAD” (the cursor automatically moves to “CEN-
TER POS/RAD” when data is set at “TOUCH POS 4”), then press the WRITE key.
The center position (xt, yt) and the diameter (D) are calculated and displayed.
ym Hole "a"
yt D
Workpiece A
0 xt xm
ME51326R0200500310003
Fig.3-3 I.D. Center Gauging

4765-E P-247
The X- and Y-coordinate values (xt, yt) of the center of hole “a” will be displayed at the calcula-
tion result display area on the screen. These coordinate values are calculated on the basis of
the corner position data (x0, y0) transferred in step 5) above and are expressed as coordinate
values in the local coordinate system (x, y) which is obtained by rotating the machine coordi-
nate system (xm, ym) by transferred angle data β.
The distance to the center calculated in the I.D. gauging is obtained at the same time and dis-
played on the screen.
ym Hole "a"
Workpiece A
y
x
75
L
150
y0 Rotation by β
Reference corner position
0 x0 xm
ME51326R0200500310004
Fig.3-4 Local Coordinate System after Comparison/Calculation

The calculation result display area shows the following data.
CAL. RESULT X: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole “a”
along the X-axis in the local coordinate system (x, y).
CAL. RESULT Y: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole “a”
along the Y-axis in the local coordinate system (x, y).
CAL. RESULT L: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole “a”.
CAL. RESULT β: The angle formed between the X-axis and segment L in the local coordi-
nate system.
[Supplement]
Angle β displayed at CAL. RESULT β is completely different from angle β which is obtained in
gauging operation and is transferred.
4765-E P-248
8. Error List
Error No. Description

Cutter R. comp input NO. This error occurs in any of the following cases.
2713
(1) The designated cutter radius compensation number is “0” or
smaller, or greater than the number of compensation pairs
selected as the machine specification.
a. Tool data 300-pair specification: The input number is greater
than 301.
b. Tool data 200-pair specification: The input number is greater
than 201.
c. Tool data 100-pair specification: The input number is greater
than 101.
(2) The cutter radius compensation number has not been desig-
nated when cutter radius compensation data should be desig-
nated.
Zero set input NO. This error occurs in any of the following cases.
2714
(1) The designated zero offset number is “0” or smaller, or greater
than the number of work coordinate system number selected as
the machine specification.
a. Work coordinate 100-pair system specification:
The input zero offset number is greater than 101.
b. Work coordinate 50-pair system specification:
c. Work coordinate 20-pair system specification:
(2) The zero offset number has not been designated when zero off-
set data should be designated.
Tool length offset input NO. This error occurs in any of the following cases.
2715 (1) The designated tool length offset number is “0” or smaller, or
greater than the number of tool length offset pair selected as the
machine specification.
a. Tool data 300-pair specification: The input number is greater
than 301.
b. Tool data 200-pair specification: The input number is greater
than 201.
c. Tool data 100-pair specification: The input number is greater
than 101.
(2) The tool length offset number has not been designated when tool
length offset data should be designated.
4765-E P-249
Error No. Description

Set data limit over This error occurs in any of the following cases (Items 3 and 4 apply
2716 when the interactive gauging function is used).
(1) When designating the REF ring diameter, the input data is out-
side the range 0 to 1000.000.
(2) When designating the reference tool diameter, the input data is
outside the range 0 to 1000.000.
(3) When designating the Z-axis upward stroke for OD gauging
mode, the input data is outside the range 0 to 2000.000.
(4) When designating the maximum contact detection stroke, the
input data is outside the range 0 to 2000.000.
Data set not ready This error occurs in any of the following cases.
2718
(1) In the work gauging mode (1. X, Y, Z, END FACE), an attempt is
made to designate a zero offset value while the reference sur-
face position has not been obtained.
(2) In the work gauging mode (2. I.D. CENTER, 3. O.D. CENTER),
an attempt is made to designate zero offset data while the center
position has not been obtained.
(3) In the work gauging mode (4. INT END CENTER, 5. EXT END
CENTER), an attempt is made to designate zero offset data
while the center position has not been obtained.
(4) In the work gauging mode (6. INCLINE, CORNER), an attempt is
made to designate zero offset data while the corner position and
inclination angle have not been obtained.
4765-E P-250
SECTION 4 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION
1. Specifications
Zero point setting and tool offset setting are carried out using the touch probe or touch sensor. Dif-
fering from conventional automatic gauging and automatic tool gauging functions, the operator can
carry out the gauging operations in the manual mode using the switches following the guide mes-
sages displayed on the screen. Therefore, the operator does not have to master special gauging
programs.
This function allows you easy and quick data setting without referring to the programming manual,
and can be effectively used for:
(1) Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining one-of-a-kind workpiece.
(2) Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining the first workpiece and begin-
ning production from the next workpiece using the set data.
(3) Setting the zero point or the tool offset data when performing machining jobs by interrupting lot
production using the same part program.
2.
X, Y, Z END FACE Screen
Z
L
I.D. CENTER Screen
REFERENCE TOUCH PROBE

INTERACT. GAUGING - PREPARATION TOUCH PROBE
SURFACE SET LENGTH OFFSET O.D. CENTER Screen
WORK GAUGING Screen (WORK) Screen RADIUS COMP Screen
Screen Screen
REF TOOL
INT END CENTER Screen
Interactive gauging effective/

ineffective switch WORK GAUGING
List of Display Screen
EXT END CENTER Screen

Screen
Interactive gauging
effective/ineffective WORK GAUGING/
switch TOOL GAUGING switch
INTERACTIVE GAUGING TOUCH SIGNAL lamp

INCLINE, CORNER Screen
GAUGING WORK TOUCH
PARAMETER (TOOL
GAUGING SIGNAL
Operation guide lamps LENGTH) Screen L

CYCLE TOOL
MODE GAUGING
AUTO MODE selection button
+BLOCK -BLOCK AUTO

MODE MODE MODE
-BLOCK MODE selection

button REF TOOL
+BLOCK MODE selection
button PREPARATION (TOOL
INTERACT. GAUGING - TOOL
LENGTH GAUGING Screen LENGTH) Screen
4765-E P-251
ME51326R0200600020001
4765-E P-252
3. Switches
3-1. Interactive Gauging Operation Panel
(1) Interactive gauging

effective/ineffective switch (2) WORK GAUGING/TOOL GAUGING switch
INTERACTIVE GAUGING (3) TOUCH SIGNAL lamp
WORK TOUCH
GAUGING GAUGING SIGNAL
(4) Operation guide lamps
CYCLE TOOL
MODE GAUGING
+BLOCK -BLOCK AUTO

MODE MODE MODE
(6) -BLOCK MODE selection

(7) +BLOCK MODE selection button button (5) AUTO MODE selection button
ME51326R0200600040001
(1) Interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch

This switch is operative when the MANUAL key on the NC operation panel is pressed.
When this switch is placed at GAUGING position, the display screen displays the INTERACT.
GAUGING screen.
(2) Work gauging/tool length gauging switch

When this switch is placed at WORK GAUGING position, the WORK GAUGING screen is dis-
played. In the same manner, when this switch is placed at TOOL GAUGING position, the TOOL
LENGTH GAUGING screen is displayed.
(3) Touch signal lamp

This lamp lights when the interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch is placed at GAUGING
mode and the touch probe or touch sensor contacts the workpiece or tool.

These lamps flicker when the selected cycle is effective. According to the selection status,
either one lamp or more than one lamp blinks.
When any of (5), (6), and (7) is selected, the lamp above the selected button stays lit.
(5) AUTO MODE selection button

Automatic gauging cycle, which is stored in advance, is called. In the case, direction of axis
motion is not restricted.
(6) -BLOCK MODE selection button

The gauging cycle in which the spindle moves only in the negative direction is called.
(7) +BLOCK MODE selection button

The gauging cycle in which the spindle moves only in the positive direction is called.
4765-E P-253
4. Terminology
RUN S.T.M SLIDE PROGRAM LIMIT ALARM

HOLD STOP
P
MacMan
AUTO MDI MANUAL EDIT AUX PARAMETER ZERO SET TOOL DATA
! " # $ DEL ( ) CAPS

A B C D E F G LOCK
, ,
@ & ? HT %
H I/ J K L M N SP
^ | [ ]
CTRL
O P Q R S T U
- { } ; < >
V
-
W X Y Z : , UPPER
CASE
7 8 9 / BS
P P
4 5 6 * CAN
1 2 3 +
0 . = - WRITE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
ME51326R0200600050001
(1) SET
Sets the entered data as new data. To issue the SET command, press the function key [F1]
(SET), enter required data through the keyboard, and then press the WRITE key.
Data cannot be set until the WRITE key is pressed.
(2) CAL
Sets the data obtained by adding or subtracting the entered data to or from the preset value as
new data. To issue the CAL command, press the function key [F3] (CAL), enter required data
through the keyboard, and then press the WRITE key.
Data cannot be set until the WRITE key is pressed.
(3) BACKUP
Data such as tool length offset, origin of work coordinate system, and parameters (except sys-
tem parameters) are stored in the memory at regular intervals as backup data. Therefore, if you
turn off the power right after you change these data, they may remain unchanged. To change
the data securely, execute the BACKUP command by pressing the function key [F7] (BACKUP)
before turning off the power.
(4) ZERO OFFSET NO. 10 (for system)

This offset number is used to register the touch sensor position (setting of the REF surface) as
the preparatory step for the gauging operation. This offset number cannot be used in usual
machining program. It is not possible to change the number by moving the cursor on the
screen.
(5) TOOL LENGTH OFFSET NO. 5 (for system)

This offset number is used as the tool offset number special to the touch probe as the prepara-
tory step for the gauging operation. It is not possible to change the number by moving the cur-
sor on the screen.
4765-E P-254
(6) REF RING CENTER HS3

This is the coordinate system used to obtain the center of the REF ring for the touch probe
diameter compensation as the preparatory step for the gauging operation. It is not possible to
change the coordinate system number by moving the cursor on the screen.
(7) Relative Offset

The reference tool length is taken as "0" and tool offset is made based on the difference
between the length of the tool in question and the reference tool length.
(8) Absolute Offset

Length of each tool is input directly and tool offset made based on the input length.
The reference tool length is: 150 mm (5.91 in.) for NT No. 40 and 200 mm (7 .87 in.) for NT No.
50.
(9) H.P. SET (ATC home position setting)

This is effective only for vertical machining centers.
The tool change position for tool length gauging cycle is set. After bringing the tool to the posi-
tion where the ATC operation can be conducted safely, press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET).
The position is registered as the ATC home position.
The auto cycle for the tool length gauging is effective only after the home position has been set.
Once set, the home position remains effective until the power is turned off.
The set home position is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, it is necessary to set the
home position after turning on the power.
4765-E P-255
5. Basic Operation
Because the manual gauging is carried out in the manual operation mode, all types of manual oper-
ations such as rapid feed, cutting feed and pulse handle feed are possible during the execution of
manual gauging. Therefore, feed the touch probe or touch sensor manually until it is brought near
the contact point.
When bringing the touch sensor or touch probe into contact with the object, select the -SINGLE,
+SINGLE, or AUTO by using the buttons on the specially prepared INTERACTIVE GAUGING oper-
ation panel and press the CYCLE START button. The slide hold and override functions are effective
in this automatic touch detection cycle.
In the slide hold mode, manual feed is also possible; to restart the automatic cycle operation, press
the CYCLE START.
The lamps above these cycle selection buttons flicker when the corresponding cycle is selectable.
When the cycle is selected from those indicated by the flickering lamps, the lamp corresponding to
the selected cycle stays lit and other lamps go off. Pressing the CYCLE START button under such
condition can begin the selected cycle.
Procedure :
1 Press the MANUAL key on the NC operation panel to select the manual operation mode.
2 Place the interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch at GAUGING position.

This establishes the interactive gauging mode. Switching between WORK GAUGING mode
and TOOL GAUGING mode is done using the work gauging/tool length gauging switch on the
INTERACTIVE GAUGING operation panel.

WORK TOUCH
CYCLE TOOL
MODE GAUGING
+BLOCK -BLOCK AUTO

MODE MODE MODE

ME51326R0200600060001
4765-E P-256
6. Outline of Interactive Gauging Function

The interactive gauging function includes the following specification. For general specifications,
refer to Section 2, "LIST OF DISPLAY SCREEN".
(1) Work Gauging Function

This is the function to carry out the zero offset using the touch probe. This function provides the
following five gauging function to meet variety of workpiece shape:
1. X, Y, Z END FACE
2. I.D. CENTER
3. O.D. CENTER
4. INT END CENTER
5. EXT END CENTER
6. INCLINE, CORNER
ME51326R0200600070001
Before carrying out the work gauging function, always carry out the gauging PREPARATION
(WORK) and PARAMETER (WORK).
4765-E P-257
(2) Tool Length Gauging Function

This is the function to carry out the tool length offset using the touch sensor.
To carry out this function, a reference tool or a tool for which the length between the gauge line
and the tool nose is known is used as the "gauge".
For the offset data, two types of offset data are available - relative offset data and absolute off-
set data. The relative tool offset data uses the difference in lengths between the reference tool
and a tool in question.
The absolute tool offset data uses the length of the tool in question between the gauge line and
the tool nose.
ME51326R0200600070002
(Relative Offset) (Absolute Offset)

Reference tool Gauge line
Value "L" is registered as the tool length offset data Value "L" is registered as the tool length offset data
ME51326R0200600070003
Before carrying out the tool length gauging, always carry out the preparation for tool length
gauging and set the gauging parameter data.
4765-E P-258
(3) Preparation for work gauging and setting the parameters

Before carrying out the work gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the data on the INTERACT.
GAUGING PREPARATION (WORK) screen and the INTERACT. GAUGING PARAMETER
(WORK) screen.
a. Preparatory step
ME51326R0200600070004
Before carrying out the work gauging function, it is necessary to set the tool offset data and
tool radius compensation (4 directions of +X, -X, +Y, -Y) data of the touch probe itself.
The touch probe length offset and radius compensation are required only when a touch
probe is changed or a touch probe has been struck against an obstacle.
b. Setting the gauging parameters
ME51326R0200600070005
4765-E P-259
Once set, the parameter setting remains effective until it is changed with new setting.
There are two types of work gauging parameters as indicated below:
• Maximum travel to detect "touch" (MAX TRVL TO TOUCH)

The maximum travel of the touch probe to detect the "touch" automatically after man-
ual positioning at the automatic gauging cycle start position.
If the "touch" signal is not obtained after the touch probe movement exceeds the set
distance, an alarm occurs and the touch probe returns to the start point.
Initial setting is 50 mm (1.97 in.).
• Spindle retract stroke during OD gauging (SPIDL UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING)

In the OD gauging mode, the spindle is retracted upward to prevent interference of the
touch probe with the workpiece.
Set this stroke for this parameter.
(4) Preparation for Tool Gauging and Setting the Parameters

Before carrying out the tool gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the data on the INTERACT.
GAUGING PREPARATION (TOOL LENGTH) screen and the INTERACT. GAUGING PARAM-
ETER (TOOL LENGTH) screen.
a. Preparatory step
ME51326R0200600070006
Before carrying out the tool length gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the touch sensor
position and the reference tool length.
The touch sensor position is set for "HS1" of system work coordination zero (the coordinate
system specially used for the setting of the touch sensor position data and cannot be used
for machining). If the touch sensor is fixed, setting is required only once. However, if the
touch sensor position is changed, it is necessary to set the data again.
When "0" is set for REF TOOL LENGT, the relative tool length offset data is obtained and
when the length between the gauge line and the tool nose is set, the absolute tool length is
offset data is obtained.
Tool length of the reference tool which is supplied by Okuma is 150 mm (5.91 in.) for No.
40 taper and 200 mm (7.87 in.) for No. 50 taper.
4765-E P-260
b. Setting the gauging parameter
ME51326R0200600070007
Once set, the parameter setting remains effective until it is changed with new setting.
There are two types of tool length gauging parameters as indicated below:
• Maximum travel to detect "touch" (MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH)

The maximum travel of the touch probe to detect the "touch" in the -BLOCK MODE
after manual positioning at the gauging cycle start position.
If the "touch" signal is not obtained after the touch probe movement exceeds the set
distance, an alarm occurs and the touch probe returns to the start point.
• Maximum tool length (MAX TOOL LENGTH)

Set the length of the longest tool that will be used in user’s plant. The data to be set dif-
fers depending on whether the relative tool length offset data is to be used or the abso-
lute tool length offset data is to be used.
4765-E P-261
The setting for this parameter determines the distance in which the tool advances to
the touch sensor at a rapid feedrate when the tool length offset data is read in the
AUTO mode after setting HP. Because the tool will be hit against the touch sensor if
the setting is too small, set the data taking safety into consideration.
HP position 5
1 2
Max. tool length +10 mm 3 4
Rapid feed
Cutting feed
Operation sequence
Touch sensor
Auto Mode Cycle
ME51326R0200600070008
CAUTION
If the maximum tool length is set to a value smaller than the actual tool length, the tool and the
touch sensor will collide.
Never set the maximum tool length shorter than the actual tool length.
4765-E P-262
7. Work Gauging Function
7-1. PARAMETER (WORK) Screen
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MANUAL mode, place the interactive gauging switch at GAUGING position,
and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at WORK GAUGING position. The
screen indicated below is displayed.
ME51326R0200600080001
2 Press the function key [F8] (GAUGING PARAM). The screen below will be displayed.
ME51326R0200600080002
4765-E P-263
3 Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TRVL TO TOUCH L=. After inputting the value,
press the function key [F1] (SET).
4 Locate the cursor at the data SPIDL UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING. After entering the value,
press the function key [F1] (SET).
5 Press the function keys [F7] (BACKUP) and [F8] (CLOSE) in this order.
7-2. PREPARATION (WORK) Screen

Prepare the followings:
- touch probe
- reference ring
- swing gauge
- reference block
- reference tool
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MANUAL mode, place the interactive gauging switch on the interactive
gauging operation panel at GAUGING position, and then place the work gauging/tool length
gauging switch at WORK GAUGING position.
The screen as indicated below is displayed.
ME51326R0200600090001
4765-E P-264
2 Press the function key [F7] (GAUGING PREPARE). Screen below will be displayed.
ME51326R0200600090002
3 Locate the cursor at the data column of NXT TOOL and key in the reference tool registration
No.
Press the 1 CYCLE START key after moving the axes to the positions where the ATC opera-
tion is possible.
The reference tool is extracted from the ATC magazine and mounted to the spindle.
4 After the reference tool has been mounted to the spindle, manually bring the reference tool into
contact with the reference block.
Then, move the cursor to the data column of ZERO OFFSET Z.
5 When the cursor is moved to the data column of ZERO OFFSET Z, the message "Write the
REF block thickness" will be displayed on the screen. Key in the thickness (L) of reference
block.
4765-E P-265
6 Press the function key [F5] (NEXT). Screen below will be displayed.
ME51326R0200600090003
7 Locate the cursor at the data column of NXT TOOL and key-in the touch probe registration No.
Press the 1 CYCLE START key after moving the axes to the position where the ATC operation
is possible.
8 After the touch probe has been mounted to the spindle, locate the cursor at the data column of
TOOL LENGTH OFFSET.
9 After confirming that the message "Position near REF face and select cycle" is displayed on
the screen, manually move the touch probe close to the reference surface.
Press "Z" key to select Z-axis for gauging axis direction.
Press -BLOCK MODE key on the INTERACTIVE GAUGING operation panel and then press
the CYCLE START button.
The touch probe will start the automatic gauging cycle.
10 The tool offset values are entered when the touch prove contacts the reference surface.
4765-E P-266
11 Press the function key [F5] (NEXT). This will display screen below.
ME51326R0200600090004
12 Fix the reference ring on the table.
13 Locate the cursor at the data column of REF RING DIA D and key-in the ring diameter.
14 After the completion of operation in step (13), the message "Find the ref ring center and press
WRITE button at that pos" is displayed on the screen. The cursor will advance to the data col-
umn of REF RING CENTER.
15 Manually remove the touch probe from the spindle and press the swing gauge against the spin-
dle.
Leave marking on the touch probe to confirm the correct phase alignment with the drive key
before removing the touch probe from the spindle.
16 Obtain the center of the reference ring by manually moving the swing gauge and align the cen-
ter of reference ring and spindle center.
Swing gauge
Datum ring
Table
ME51326R0200600090005
4765-E P-267
Press the WRITE key at that position. The values for ZERO OFFSET NO. 3 (for system) (X, Y)
will be changed and the cursor will advance to the data column of RAD COMP.
ME51326R0200600090006
17 While maintaining the X and Y axes at the center of the reference ring, retract the Z-axis.
Remove the swing gauge from the spindle and mount the touch probe to the spindle while
aligning the match mark with the drive key.
Then, manually carry out spindle orientation. If the touch probe radius compensation is carried
out without carrying out spindle orientation, a gauging error might be caused.
18 Lower Z-axis until the touch probe tip will come into the reference ring. Press "X" key to select
X-axis, and press AUTO MODE button and CYCLE START button in this order.
4765-E P-268
19 The touch probe will execute the automatic gauging cycle and the values for RAD COMP 1, 2,
3 and 4 will be entered.
ME51326R0200600090007
3 3
2 1
2 6 5 1
6 5
4 4
Solid line : Cutting feed
Broken line: Rapid feed
Automatic Gauging Cycle of Touch Probe

ME51326R0200600090008
20 Pressing the function keys [F7] (BACKUP) and [F8] (CLOSE) in this order will return the screen
to the WORK GAUGING MENU screen.
4765-E P-269
7-3. X, Y, Z END FACE
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MANUAL mode, place the interactive gauging switch at GAUGING position,
and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at WORK GAUGING position.
ME51326R0200600100001
2 Locate the cursor at "1. X, Y, Z END FACE" on the MENU screen above and press the WRITE
key. Screen below will be displayed.
ME51326R0200600100002
4765-E P-270
3 Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate No.).

The work coordinate No. can be selected irrespective of the work coordinate No. currently
effective.
4 After the completion of operation in step 3, the zero offset values of the selected coordinate
system and the actual position values in the selected coordinate system will be displayed.
ME51326R0200600100003
5 Move the touch probe close to the gauging position.
6 Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out by pressing any of the AXIS
SELECT keys.
When the axis is selected, the cursor will advance to the data column of the selected axis of
ZERO OFFSET.
7 The indicating lamps of +BLOCK MODE and -BLOCK MODE flicker.

4765-E P-271
Select the direction in which the touch probe is moved. The indicating lamp of the direction
selected will continue flickering, while the lamp of the direction not selected will stop flickering.

WORK TOUCH
CYCLE TOOL
MODE GAUGING
+BLOCK -BLOCK AUTO

MODE MODE MODE

ME51326R0200600100004
8 Pressing the CYCLE START button starts the automatic gauging cycle in the selected direc-
tion.
9 The touch probe moves at the speed determined by the cutting override switch setting until it
will contact the workpiece.
10 After the touch probe has contacted the workpiece, it will once retract for 0.5 mm from the
workpiece and then contact the workpiece again. The speed at which this motion is conducted
is constant disregarding the cutting override switch setting.
11 After the second contact, the touch probe returns to the previous gauging position.
12 The zero offset data is changed; zero offset is carried out automatically so that the coordinate
value of the contact position will be "0".
13 To set the zero offset data so that the contact position coordinate values will be other than "0",
select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key and the cursor moves to the data area of the
selected axis. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required value.
4765-E P-272
[Supplement]
1) When a wrong operation mode has been selected +BLOCK MODE, -BLOCK MODE or wrong
zero offset data has been entered, press either the function key [F7] (QUIT) or RESET key.
2) An alarm, indicating the gauging cycle is not possible, is lit in the following cases:
- The contact is not detected within the distance set for a parameter.
- The CYCLE START switch is pressed after selecting the +BLOCK MODE or -BLOCK MODE
with the pulse handle selected.
Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm state.
3) The direction in which an axis moves in the automatic cycle coincides with the direction of the
axis selected using the AXIS SELECT key.
If a wrong axis is selected, the touch sensor will not move in the required direction.
For ID or OD gauging, select the X-axis for automatic mode.
The cursor on the screen moves to the axis which is selected using the AXIS SELECT key.
That is, when X-axis is selected, the cursor moves to the X-axis data column of ZERO OFF-
SET.
AXIS SELECT
X Y Z
4 5 PULSE
HANDLE
ME51326R0200600100005
ME51326R0200600100006
When the PULSE HANDLE is selected using the AXIS SELECT key, the cursor on the screen
is cleared; if the gauging cycle is started under such condition, an alarm occurs.
4765-E P-273
7-4. I.D. CENTER
Procedure :
1 After selecting the manual mode, place the interactive gauging switch at GAUGING position,
ME51326R0200600110001
2 Locate the cursor at the data column of "2. I.D. CENTER" on the above screen and press the
WRITE key.
Screen below will be displayed.
ME51326R0200600110002

4765-E P-274
4 The indicating lamps of +BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE flicker.
5 The message "Position near end-face, select axis, then select cycle" will be displayed on the
screen.
Feed the touch probe manually to the following position and then feed it into the hole.
AUTO MODE .... Near the center of the hole
+BLOCK MODE .... Near the wall of the hole in the +X-axis direction
[Supplement]
Selection of the AUTO MODE and +BLOCK MODE should be made according to the ID
dimension.
AUTO MODE ......... The ID is 2 x max. travel or less to touch.
+BLOCK MODE ...... The ID is greater than 2 x max. travel to touch.
The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.).
Change the setting as needed.
6 AUTO MODE
When the AUTO MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of AUTO MODE will continue flicker-
ing.
Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button.
The gauging cycle starts and gauging is carried out in the sequence of X-axis, Y-axis, and X-
axis. Finally, the touch probe stops at the center of the hole and the gauging cycle is com-
pleted. The zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that the X and Y coordinate values of
the center of the hole will be (0, 0).
7 +BLOCK MODE
When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE will continue
flickering.
+BLOCK -BLOCK
MODE MODE AUTO
ME51326R0200600110003
(1) Feed the touch probe manually close to point "1" as illustrated below and insert it into the
hole.
Manual feed
X
2 1
ME51326R0200600110004
4765-E P-275
(2) Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button.
(3) The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the positive direction of X-axis and
after the detection of "contact", it returns to the previously located position.
(4) The indicating lamp of AUTO MODE continues flickering, while the indicating lamp of
+BLOCK MODE stops flickering.
(5) Manually feed the touch probe close to point "2" as shown in (1).
In this axis movement, move only X-axis and do not move Y-axis. If Y-axis is moved, the
results of the gauging cycle are not correct.
(6) Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the cycle start switch.
+BLOCK -BLOCK
AUTO
MODE MODE
ME51326R0200600110005
(7) The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the negative direction of X-axis and
after the detection of "contact", it moves to the center position. Then, the cycle is continu-
ously carried out in the order of Y-axis and X-axis. Finally, the touch probe stops at the
center of the hole.
After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that the
X and Y coordinate values of the center of the hole will be (0, 0). At the same time, the ID
measurement is also displayed.
(8) When zero offset is required so that the coordinate values of the obtained center of the
hole will be other than "0", select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves
to the data area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL)
and enter the required value.
4765-E P-276
7-5. O.D. CENTER
Procedure :
Screen as indicated below will be displayed.
ME51326R0200600120001
2 Locate the cursor at the data column of "3. O.D. CENTER" on the above screen ad press the
WRITE key.
ME51326R0200600120002

4765-E P-277
4 The indicating lamp of -BLOCK MODE will flicker.
5 Manually move the touch probe to the position "1" of the drawing below.
Manual feed
X
2 1
ME51326R0200600120003
After the positioning of the X- and Y-axes, move the touch probe down; the infeed amount ("A"
in drawing above) must be smaller than the spindle retract stroke set for SPIDL UP TRVL AT
O.D. GAUGING.
6 Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the -BLOCK MODE and press the
CYCLE START button.
7 The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the negative direction of X-axis and after
the detection of "contact", it returns to the previously located position and then the Z-axis
moves upward.
The Z-axis upward movement amount is as the amount set for SPIDLE UP TRVL AT O.D.
GAUGING. The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm. Change the setting when needed.
8 Manually move the touch probe close to position "2" in drawing in 5. In this axis movement,
move only X-axis and do not move Y-axis. If Y-axis is moved, the results obtained in the gaug-
ing cycle will not be correct.
9 Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the AUTO MODE and press the CYCLE
START button.
10 The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the positive direction of X-axis and after the
detection of "contact", the Z-axis moves upward and then to the center of the OD.
The gauging is carried out in the sequence of Y-axis and X-axis while Z-axis moves upward
and downward. Finally the touch probe stops at the center of the hole.
The zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that the X and Y coordinate values of the
center of the hole will be (0, 0).
At the same time, the OD measurement is also displayed.
11 When zero offset is required so that the coordinate values of the obtained center of the hole will
be other than "0", select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data
area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the
required value.
4765-E P-278
7-6. INT END CENTER
Procedure :
ME51326R0200600130001
2 Locate the cursor at "4. INT END CENTER" on the above screen and press the WRITE key.
ME51326R0200600130002
4765-E P-279
4 The indicating lamps of +BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE will flicker.
5 The message "Position near end-face, select axis, then select cycle" will be displayed on the
screen.
Feed the touch probe manually to the following position and then feed it into the groove.
AUTO MODE .... Near the center of the internal end face
+BLOCK MODE .... Near the wall of the groove in the positive direction of the selected axis
[Supplement]
Selection of the AUTO MODE and +BLOCK MODE should be made according to the inter-
nal end face dimension.
AUTO MODE ........ When the internal end face is 2 x max. travel or less to touch.
+BLOCK MODE ..... When the internal end face is greater than 2 x max. travel to touch.
The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.). Change the setting as needed.
6 AUTO MODE
When AUTO MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of AUTO MODE will continue flickering.
Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out using the AXIS SELECT key and
press the CYCLE START button.
The gauging cycle starts. The zero offset is carried out so that the coordinate value of the cen-
ter of the internal end face will be "0".
1 Y
Manual
feed
X
2
Y-axis zero offset
2 1
X-axis zero offset

ME51326R0200600130003
4765-E P-280
7 +BLOCK MODE
When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE will continue
flickering.When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE will
continue flickering.
(1) Move the touch probe manually close to point "1" as illustrated below and insert it into the
groove.
2 1
ME51326R0200600130004
(2) Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button.
(3) The gauging cycle starts. After the completion of gauging, the touch probe returns to the
previously located position.
(4) Move the touch probe close to the opposite wall of the groove.
(5) Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the -BLOCK MODE and press the
CYCLE START button.
After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of the axis gauged is carried out so that the
coordinate value of the center will be "0". At the same time, the internal end face dimen-
sion (width between walls) is also displayed.
(6) When zero offset is required so that the coordinate value of the obtained center will be
other than "0", select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data
area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter
the required value.
[Supplement]
In this example, the -BLOCK MODE cycle is carried out after the completion of the +BLOCK
MODE cycle. The operation in the reverse order is also possible.
4765-E P-281
7-7. EXT END CENTER
Procedure :
1 After selecting the manual mode, place the interactive gauging switch at GAUGING position
ME51326R0200600140001
2 Locate the cursor at "5. EXT END CENTER" on the above screen and press the WRITE key.
ME51326R0200600140002
4765-E P-282
4 The indicating lamp of -BLOCk MODE will flicker.
5 Manually move the touch probe to the position "1" of the drawing below.
After the positioning of the X- and Y-axes, move the touch probe down; this infeed amount ("A"
in drawing above) must be smaller than the spindle retract stroke set for SPIDL UP TRVL AT
O.D. GAUGING.
Y-axis zero offset
X-axis zero offset

2 1
Y
ME51326R0200600140003
6 Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out by pressing any of the AXIS
SELECT keys.
Press the -BLOCK MODE button and the CYCLE START button.
7 The gauging cycle starts. After the completion of gauging, the touch probe returns to the previ-
ously located position.
8 Manually move the touch probe close to the opposite side wall.
9 Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the +BLOCK MODE and press the CYCLE
START button.
After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of the axis gauged is carried out so that the
coordinate value of the center will be "0". At the same time, the external end face dimension is
also displayed.
10 When zero offset is required so that the coordinate value of the obtained center will be other
than "0", select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data area of the
corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required
value.
4765-E P-283
[Supplement]
In this example, the -BLOCK MODE cycle is carries out after the completion of the +BLOCK
MODE cycle. The operation in the reverse order is also possible.
Select "5. EXT END CENTER" for the case indicated below where the touch probe is brought into
contact twice in the same direction.
ME51326R0200600140004
4765-E P-284
7-8. INCLINE, CORNER
Procedure :
1 Select the "MAN. OPERATION" mode. Set the interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch
on the interactive gauging operation panel to "GAUGING".
Set the WORK GAUGING/TOOL GAUGING switch to "WORK GAUGING". The following
screen appears.
ME51326R0200600150001
2 Locate the cursor at "6. INCLINE, CORNER" on the above MENU screen and press the
WRITE key to display the screen below.
ME51326R0200600150002
4765-E P-285
3 Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate system No.) and press the WRITE key.
ME51326R0200600150003
4 According to the message "1 Position near end-face and select cycle", manually move the
probe close to the position "1" on the screen and select "+BLOCK MODE". Then, press the
CYCLE START button.
5 On completion the gauging cycle, the probe returns to the original position. The gauged value
obtained at this time is not displayed on the screen.
probe close to the position "2" on the screen and select "+BLOCK MODE". Then, press the
CYCLE START button.
probe close to the position "3" on the screen. Select "+BLOCK MODE" in the case of corner
position A and "-BLOCK MODE" in the case of B. Then, press the CYCLE START button.
4765-E P-286
8 On completion of the gauging cycle, corner position and angle are automatically displayed.
ME51326R0200600150004
9 After gauging operation, press [F8] (CLOSE) to return to the initial screen.
[Supplement]
The angle obtained through the gauging operation will be registered at the system common vari-
able VS65.
The value at VS65 cannot be checked on the display screen and will be lost when the power is
turned off. (a) to check the value or (b) to retain the value even with the power off, follow the
steps below.
1) Press the MDI key to select the MDI operation mode.
2) Enter VC =VS65 through the keyboard.
3) Press the CYCLE START button.
The value at VS65 is entered to VC .
Here, VC is a general-use common variable and its value can be checked on the PARAME-
TER SET screen.
[Supplement]
Create a program as follows:

:
G11 P=VC
:
4765-E P-287
8. Tool Length Gauging
8-1. Parameter (Tool Length)
Procedure :
and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at TOOL GAUGING position.
ME51326R0200600160001
2 Press the function key [F3] (GAUGING PARAM).

ME51326R0200600160002
4765-E P-288
3 Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH L= and press the function
key [F1] (SET). Enter the value.
4 Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TOOL LENGTH and press the function key [F1]
(SET). Enter the value.
8-2. Preparation (Tool Length)

Prepare the followings:
- small dia. drill
- reference tool
Procedure :
and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at TOOL GAUGING position.
ME51326R0200600170001
4765-E P-289
2 After confirming that the message "Write the next gauging tool number and start ATC 1
CYCLE" is displayed on the above screen, press the function key [F1] (SET) and key-in the
registration No. of the small dia. drill. (This operation is necessary to align the center of the drill
tool (X-, Y-axes) and the center of the touch sensor.)
ME51326R0200600170002
3 Press the 1 CYCLE START key and mount the small dia. drill to the spindle.
4 Align the center of the drill (X-, Y-axes) and the center of the touch sensor. (by eye measure
allowed)
5 Press the function key [F2] (GAUGING PREPARE).
6 Locate the cursor at the data column of ZERO OFFSET X and press the WRITE key.
The zero offset for X-axis will be executed.
7 Locate the cursor at the data column of ZERO OFFSET Y and press the WRITE key.
The zero offset for Y-axis will be executed.
8 Move Z-axis upward while holding X- and Y-axis at that position, and remove the small dia. drill
in the spindle and mount the reference tool instead.
4765-E P-290
9 Manually move the Z-axis downward and locate the reference tool close to the touch sensor.
The distance between the reference tool and the touch sensor must be smaller than the value
set for MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH L.
The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.).
ME51326R0200600170003
10 After pressing the -BLOCK MODE key, select Z-axis by pressing the AXIS SELECT key.
Then, press the CYCLE START button.
11 The gauging cycle starts. After the reference tool has contacted the touch probe, the reference
tool returns to the previously located position.
13 Move the Z-axis upward. Manually remove the reference tool from the spindle and mount the
small dia. drill instead.
14 Move the spindle to the position where ATC operation is possible (Z-axis ... plus limit, Y- and Z-
axis ... position which is free of interference) and press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET). This
position is set as the home position for tool change operation.
15 Press the 1 CYCLE START key without setting the data for next tool. The small dia. drill will be
returned to the ATC magazine.
16 To proceed with the tool length gauging cycle, key-in the registration No. of the tool at NXT
TOOL and carry out the 1 CYCLE START function.
4765-E P-291
8-3. Tool Length Gauging

The tool length gauging cycle consists of the two modes - -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE.
-BLOCk MODE .... The gauging cycle is carried out after a cutting tool is positioned
above the touch sensor manually. In this mode, only Z-axis is con-
trolled and after the detection of "contact", the cutting tool returns to
the previously located position.
AUTO MODE .... The cycle is enabled after the HP (ATC position for interactive gaug-
ing operation) has been set. The cutting tool is positioned automati-
cally at a position above the touch sensor and then the Z-axis moves
down until the "contact" is detected.
After the detection of "contact", the cutting tool returns to the HP posi-
tion.
For both the -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE, select Z-axis using the AXIS SELECT key.
Use these modes to measure the tool length of a boring bar, face milling cutter, end mill and other
types of cutting tools which do not have the cutting tip at the center of the tool because manual oper-
ation (spindle free, manual pulse feed, rapid feed) is allowed during slide hold mode.
To restart the operation after activating the slide hold function, press the CYCLE START button.
Procedure :
1 After selecting the manual mode, place the interactive gauging switch at the GAUGING posi-
tion, and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at the TOOL GAUGING posi-
tion.
ME51326R0200600180001
2 The cursor is located at the data column of NXT TOOL. After keying-in the registration No. of
the tool to be gauged, press the 1 CYCLE START key.
4765-E P-292
3 The cursor moves to the data column of TOOL-L OFST NO. Enter the tool length offset num-
ber.
ME51326R0200600180002
4 When the tool offset number is entered, the -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE indicating
lamps will light up.
5 The cursor moves to the data column of TOOL-L OFFSET.
6 -BLOCK MODE
ME51326R0200600180003
4765-E P-293
a. Manually move the cutting tool above the touch sensor and select Z-axis with the AXIS
SELECT key.
b. Press the -BLOCK MODE switch and then the CYCLE START button.
c. When the cutting tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor, the tool length offset
value is displayed automatically and the Z-axis moves up.
7 AUTO MODE
a. Press the AUTO MODE switch and the CYCLE START button. The cutting tool begins
moving from the HP (home position) automatically until it is brought into contact with the
touch sensor.
b. Upon contact with the touch sensor, the tool length offset data is automatically displayed.
c. The cutting tool returns to the HP automatically.
[Supplement]
Setting the HP
After positioning the cutting tool at a position (X, Y, Z) where interference will not occur when
the ATC cycle is carried out, press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET).
Because the set HP is lost when the power is turned off, it in necessary to set the HP each
time the power is turned on.
4765-E P-294
9. Other Supplementary Explanations

When the work gauging cycle is carried out, zero point is automatically offset at the completion of
the cycle. However, if automatic zero offsetting is not required and only the work gauging should be
carried out, set "0" for bit 7 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46. Initial setting is "1" when the
machine is shipped.
ME51326R0200600190001
For carrying out the tool length gauging cycle, this manual assumes that all tools are stored in the
tool magazine and that the tool for which the tool gauging cycle is to be carried out is set in the spin-
dle in the automatic tool change cycle. In other word, the required tool is set in the spindle by carry-
ing out the automatic tool change cycle after entering the corresponding tool number for NXT TOOL.
If the tool to be gauged is set in the spindle by hand instead of using the ATC, and if that tool is
returned to the tool magazine using the ATC, enter the tool number of manually set tool for ACT
TOOL. To return the tool to the required pot in the tool magazine, enter the pot number at POT NO.
before starting the ATC cycle. If the tool may be returned to any pot, carry out the ATC cycle without
designation the return pot number.
In this case, the tool is returned to an empty pot automatically.
(1) NC parameters
a. Set whether or not the automatic zero setting is carried out when the work gauging cycle is
carried out.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46, bit 7
1 : Automatic zero setting is carried out.
0 : Only gauging is carried out.
4765-E P-295
b. Set whether only the automatic cycle is effective or both the automatic and block cycles are
effective at the start of the work gauging cycle.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46, bit 6
1 : Both the block and automatic modes are effective.
0 : Only the automatic mode is effective.
+ BLOCK MODE -BLOCK MODE AUTO MODE

X, Y, Z END FACE –
I.D. CENTER ∆ –
(First in the + BLOCK
O.D. CENTER – MODE, then in the
AUTO MODE)
INT END CENTER ∆ ∆
EXT END CENTER –
: Effective regardless of parameter setting (the indicating lamp flick-

ers.)
∆ : Effective when designated with a parameter.
– : Ineffective
c. Set the unit system used for the display and parameter setting.
NC optional parameter bit No. 9
Bit No. Contents SET 1 SET 0 Factory Set Initial Value
In data setting, unit system of length is either
0 Inch mm 0
"inch" or "mm".
In data setting unit is either minimum setting unit or 1 mm, Mini-
1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec. 1 inch, mum
1 1
1 deg, setting
1 sec unit
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
In the data setting, the decimal point indicates 1 Basic bit 1
6 0
mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. unit setting
7 0
10.
X, Y, Z END -BLOCK +BLOCK

or Move the touch probe manually close to (within the maximum travel to detect "contact") the
FACE Screen MODE MODE
workpiece. Then, carry out the -BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK MODE cycle.
AUTO MODE Move the touch probe manually close to the center of the hole and carry out the AUTO MODE
cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the inside diameter which is smaller than the maximum
I.D. CENTER travel to detect "contact".
Screen
3
+BLOCK MODE Manual Feed AUTO MODE Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the
2 0 1 +BLOCk MODE cycle, manually move the touch prober close to position "2".
Then, carry out the AUTO MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the inside diameter which
4
is smaller than two times the maximum travel to detect "contact".
O.D. CENTER -BLOCK MODE Manual Feed AUTO MODE Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the -
Screen
Operation Flow
3 BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch sensor to position "2". Then, carry out the
INTERACT. AUTO MODE cycle.
GAUGING - 2 0 1
WORK GAUGING
MENU Screen 4 AUTO MODE Move the touch probe manually close to the center of the groove (between the walls) and
carry out the AUTO MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the width between the
INT END CENTER walls whose distance is smaller than two times the maximum distance to detect "contact".
Screen
2
+BLOCK MODE Manual Feed AUTO MODE Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the
1
+BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch probe close to position "2".
0 Then carry out the -BLOCK MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the width between the
EXT END CENTER Manual Feed Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the -
Screen -BLOCK MODE +BLOCK MODE
BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch sensor to position "2". Then, carry out the
2 1
0 +BLOCK MODE cycle.
INCKINE, +BLOCK MODE Manual Feed +BLOCK MODE

CORNER Screen
Manual Feed -BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK MODE Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" and carry out the +BLOCK MODE cycle.
Next, move the probe close to position "2" and carry out BLOCk MODE cycle again. Then,
move the probe manually close to position "3" and carry out -BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK
MODE cycle.
HP Setting AUTO MODE Move the cutting tool manually to a position where interference will not occur when the ATC
INTERACT.
cycle is carried out. Set the home position at this position and carry out the AUTO cycle.
GAUGING - TOOL LENGTH After the tool length gauging cycle is carried out, the cutting tool returns to the home position;
TOOL LENGTH GAUGING Screen
this completes the cycle. The set home position remains effective until the power is turned off.
GAUGING Screen
-BLOCK MODE After moving the cutting tool close to (within the maximum travel to detect "contact") the touch
sensor, carry out the -BLOCK MODE cycle.
4765-E P-296
ME51326R0200600200001
4765-E P-297
11. Error List
No. Error Message Contents

Cutter R. comp input (1) The designated cutter radius compensation number is "0" or smaller, or
NO. greater than the number of compensation pairs selected with user’s
2713 specification.
a. Tool data 300-pair specification
The input number is greater than 301.
b. Tool data 200-pair specification
c. Tool data 100-pair specification
(2) The cutter radius compensation number has not been designated when
the cutter radius compensation data should be designated.
Zero set input NO. (1) The designated zero offset number is "0" or smaller, or greater than the
2714 number of work coordinate system number selected with user’s specifi-
cation.
a. Work coordinate 100-pair system specification
b. Work coordinate 50-pair system specification
c. Work coordinate 20-pair system specification
(2) The zero offset number has not been designated when the zero offset
data should be designated.
Tool length offset (1) The designated tool length offset number is "0" or smaller, or greater
input NO. than the number of tool length offset pair selected with user’s specifica-
2715 tion.
a. Tool data 300-pair specification
b. Tool data 200-pair specification
c. Tool data 100-pair specification
(2) The tool length offset number has not been designated when the tool
length offset data should be designated.
Set data limit over (1) When designating the REF ring diameter, the input data is outside the
2716 range of 0 to 1000.000.
(2) When designating the reference tool diameter, the input data is outside
the range of 0 to 1000.000.
(3) When designating the Z-axis upward stroke for OD gauging mode, the
input data is outside the range of 0 to 2000.000.
(4) When designating the maximum contact detection stroke, the input
data is outside the range of 0 to 2000.000.
Note: Causes (3) and (4) above apply when the interactive gauging func-
tion is used.
4765-E P-298
No. Error Message Contents

Data set not ready (1) In the work gauging mode (1. X, Y, Z, END FACE), an attempt is made
2718 to designate a zero offset value while the reference surface position
has not been obtained.
(2) In the work gauging mode (2. I.D. CENTER, 3. O.D. CENTER), an
attempt is made to designate a zero offset data while the center posi-
tion has not been obtained.
(3) In the work gauging mode (4. INT END CENTER, 5. EXT END CEN-
TER), an attempt is made to designate a zero offset data while the cen-
ter position has not been obtained.
(4) In the work gauging mode (6. INCLINE, CORNER), an attempt is made
to designate a zero offset data while the corner position and inclination
angle have not been obtained.
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
Publication No. Date Edition
4765-E June 2001 1st
4765-E-R1 June 2005 2nd
This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or
design changes.
Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.
If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual, please
contact your OKUMA representative.

Gauging Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Gauging Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GAUGING SYSTEMS

1. Precautions Relating to Machine Installation

• Ambient temperature: 17 to 25°C

• Ambient humidity: 40% to 75% at 20°C (no condensation)

• Voltage fluctuation: ±10% max.

• Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz

(3) Installation Environment

2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

3. Precautions Relating to Operation

(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.

4. Precautions Relating to the ATC

6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.

(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure

• MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure

a. Cleaning the cooling unit

• Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?

• Is the external air inlet blocked?

8. Symbols Used in This Manual

(1) Expandable CNC with a multi-main CPU system

(2) Compact and highly reliable

(3) NC operation panels

• Color CRT operation panels

• Thin color operation panels (horizontal)

• Thin color operation panels (vertical)

(4) Machining management functions

a. Reduction of setup time

b. Production Status Monitor

c. Reduction of troubleshooting time

(5) Help functions

SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION.....................................................97

9-2. Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart ....................................................................... 165

SECTION 3 MANUAL GAUGING ............................................................................174

SECTION 4 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION................................................250

7-7. EXT END CENTER ...................................................................................................... 281

SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/

• Specifications for automatic tool length offset only, and

1-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset

1-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

1-3. Displaying the Result of Gauging

1-3-1. Displaying the Gauging Results Display Screen

1 Select an operation mode (automatic, MDI, manual).

2 Press function key DISPLAY CHANGE [F8].

3 In the DISPLAY CHANGE window, select “GAUGING RESULTS”.

4 Press function key CLOSE [F8].

1-3-2. Function Menu

When the extend key is pressed.

The function menu relating to gauging result processing is described below.

Function Menu Description

TOOL/ZERO Function Key

1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3 Press function key TOOL/ZERO [F1].

MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key

1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3 Press function key MSB ZERO ON/OFF [F4].

MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key

1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3 Press function key MSB TOOL ON/OFF [F5].

SENSstat ON/OFF Function Key